JP6361997B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily recognizing the rear of an upper portion of a window member. A pachinko gaming machine includes a gaming machine frame including an outer frame, an inner frame, and a front frame. The front frame 53 includes a glass plate 55 that makes the game area 3 visible, and an upper decoration portion 200 that is positioned above the glass plate 55 (window member) and decorates the upper portion of the front frame 53. A lower cover 800 is provided on the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200, and the lower cover 800 forms an inclined surface that extends obliquely upward toward the rear on the lower side. A front lower end portion (a front end lower end portion of the lower cover 800) located on the front side of the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is positioned below the upper portion 55 a of the glass plate 55. On the other hand, the rear lower end portion (the rear lower end portion 67X of the speakers 67L and 67R) located on the rear side of the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is positioned above the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55. [Selection] Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a revolving type gaming machine (pachislot gaming machine).

  Conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine that is one of the gaming machines, a gaming machine frame that constitutes the outline of the pachinko gaming machine is provided, and a gaming board that forms a gaming area is attached inside the gaming machine frame. Yes. In addition, the gaming machine frame includes a glass plate (window member) that makes it possible to visually recognize the gaming area from the front, and an upper decoration portion that is positioned above the glass plate and decorates the gaming machine frame. In recent years, many pachinko machines in which a movable frame movable member is attached to the upper decoration part have been seen.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 below, a doll (frame movable member) that can move in the vertical direction and a storage member that can store the doll are arranged in the upper decoration portion. Therefore, for example, when the jackpot is won, the doll projects upward so as to be exposed from the housing member. Thereby, it is possible to give the impact of the production to the player.

JP 2004-16722 A

  However, like the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned document, the upper decorative part tends to be large due to the fact that a frame movable member is arranged in the recent upper decorative part or a large decorative member, a light emitting member, or the like is arranged. There is. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 20 of the above-mentioned document, the lower end of the upper decorative portion (the lowermost end of the effect movable object 17) can be lower than the position of the upper portion of the glass plate. Then, there was a possibility that it would be difficult for the player to visually recognize the rear of the upper portion of the glass plate (window member).

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the place made into the subject is providing the game machine which can make it easy to visually recognize the back of the upper part of a window member.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
In a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A gaming machine frame including a frame-shaped base frame portion and a front frame portion located on the front side of the base frame portion;
Display means having a predetermined display area,
The gaming machine frame is
A window member that is provided inside the gaming machine frame and allows a game area where a game ball can flow down to be visually recognized ;
An upper decoration part that is positioned above the window member and decorates the upper part of the gaming machine frame,
At least a part of the display area is arranged above the game area and is arranged behind the upper part of the window member,
The upper decorative part is
The lower end portion is formed so as to be positioned upward as it goes rearward,
A front lower end portion located on the front side of the lower end portion, and a rear lower end portion located on the rear side of the lower end portion,
The front lower end portion is positioned below the upper portion of the window member, while the rear lower end portion is positioned higher than the upper portion of the window member, so that at least one of the display areas. It is comprised so that a part can be visually recognized.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the rear of the upper portion of the window member.

1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the gaming machine frame provided in the gaming machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine. It is a right view of the gaming machine. It is a top view of the gaming machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the same gaming machine from diagonally right below. It is a perspective view of the outer frame shown in FIG. FIG. 8A is an enlarged perspective view of a portion B shown in FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged perspective view of a portion C shown in FIG. It is a perspective view of the inner frame shown in FIG. (A) is an enlarged perspective view of a D portion shown in FIG. 9, and (B) is an enlarged perspective view of an E portion shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the base frame of the front frame shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between an inner frame side mounting member and an inner side protruding part when closing an inner frame with respect to an outer frame. (A) is a figure which shows shaving of the inner frame side mounting member in a comparative example, (B) is a figure which shows shaving of the inner frame side mounting member in this form, (C) is a figure of an inner side protruding part. It is a figure which shows the curvature of a front-end part. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a front frame side mounting member and an L-shaped protruding part when closing a front frame with respect to an inner frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side fixed frame, the up-and-down slide frame, and the holding frame from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the right side fixed frame and locking device from the front, (B) is the perspective view which shows the state which removed the right side fixing frame and locking device cover shown to FIG. 16 (A). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the up-and-down slide frame from the left, (B) is the perspective view which shows the relationship between a left-right slide frame, a rotation piece, and a 4th locking piece. (A) is a perspective view which shows the relationship between an up-and-down slide frame and an upper coil spring, (B) is a perspective view which shows the relationship between an upper fixed frame, a left-right slide frame, and a special locking piece. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the special latching piece has latched to the L-shaped part of the left-right slide frame. It is a bottom view of the fall prevention mechanism shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the FF line of FIG. (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the first plate and the second plate are rotated around the first shaft pin from the state shown in FIG. 20, and (B) is a second plate from the state shown in FIG. 22 (A). It is a perspective view which shows the state which rotated around the 2nd axis pin. It is the perspective view which looked at the fall prevention mechanism which is a use state from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the 1st engaging part engages with the rear surface of a fixing tool, and the 2nd engaging part engages with the front surface of a fixing tool. It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine when the fall prevention mechanism is in use from diagonally right above. It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine when the fall prevention mechanism is in use from diagonally lower right. It is a front view of the game board unit with which the same gaming machine is provided. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view when the game board unit shown in FIG. 27 is seen from the right side. It is a front view which shows roughly the 2nd big prize apparatus with which the game machine is provided. FIG. 28 is an enlarged view of a portion A shown in FIG. 27, and is a diagram showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view when the same gaming machine is viewed from the right side. It is a figure which shows the ball processing unit (sand) which can be attached to the same game machine. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the movable body unit with which the game machine is provided, and a base frame. (A) is a top view of a movable body unit, (B) is a front view of a movable body unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which removed the speaker from the movable body unit shown to FIG. 34 (A) from the downward direction. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body unit shown in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the unit main body shown in FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the front cover shown in FIG. 36, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the front cover of FIG. 38 (A). It is a disassembled perspective view of the rotation mechanism part shown in FIG. (A) is a front view of the left link unit shown in FIG. 39, and (B) is a longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 40 (A). (A) is a figure which shows roughly the relationship between the frame movable body in a standby position, and each member of a left side link unit, (B) is the frame movable body and left link rotated from the position of FIG. 41 (A). It is a figure which shows the relationship with each member of a unit roughly. (A) is a figure which shows roughly the relationship between the frame movable body rotated from the position of FIG. 41 (B), and each member of a left side link unit, (B) rotated from the position of FIG. 42 (A). It is a figure which shows roughly the relationship between a frame movable body and each member of a left side link unit. (A) is a figure which shows roughly the relationship between the frame movable body rotated from the position of FIG.42 (B), and each member of a left side link unit, (B) is the frame movable body in an operating position, and a left link. It is a figure which shows the relationship with each member of a unit roughly. (A) is a figure which shows the state which the frame movable body has started standing so that the rear-end part of a frame movable body may move ahead and upwards, (B) is a frame rather than the position shown to FIG. 44 (A). It is a figure which shows the state in which the movable body is standing. It is a disassembled perspective view of the frame movable body shown in FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the right ear movable body shown in FIG. 45, and (B) is a perspective view of the relationship between the right ear member and the base plate shown in FIG. 45 as viewed from the back side. (A) is a front view schematically showing the ear unit when the ear member is in the storage position, and (B) is a rear view schematically showing the ear unit when the ear member is in the storage position. (A) is a front view schematically showing the ear unit when the ear member is in the retracted position, and (B) is a rear view schematically showing the ear unit when the ear member is in the retracted position. (A) is a front view schematically showing the ear unit when the ear member is in the protruding position, and (B) is a rear view schematically showing the ear unit when the ear member is in the protruding position. (A) is a right side view of the face unit when the jaw member is in the closed position, and (B) is a right side view of the face unit when the jaw member is in the open position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ear unit from diagonally lower left, and (B) is the longitudinal cross-sectional view when the ear unit is seen from the right side. 51A is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state in which the jaw member shown in FIG. 51A is manually moved to the open position, and FIG. 51B is a position where the jaw member shown in FIG. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the state moved to. (A) is the disassembled perspective view of the lower cover shown in FIG. 37, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the connection board shown in FIG. 39 from the downward direction. (A) is a longitudinal sectional perspective view of the movable body unit when the frame movable body is in the standby position, and (B) is a longitudinal sectional perspective view of the movable body unit when the frame movable body is in the operating position. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the lower wall part of the upper side decoration part shown in FIG. 1, and the upper part of a glass plate. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front side plate of the upper side cover member shown in FIG. It is a perspective view when a frame movable body exists in an operation position and an ear member exists in a protrusion position. It is a front view when a frame movable body exists in an operation position, and an ear member exists in a protrusion position. It is a right view when a frame movable body exists in an operation position and an ear member exists in a protrusion position. It is the perspective view seen from diagonally lower right when the frame movable body is in the operating position and the ear member is in the protruding position. It is a perspective view which shows the state in which the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention is located in a line with right and left. (A) (B) is explanatory drawing in case a frame movable body stands up so that the front-end part of a frame movable body moves back and upwards as a comparative example, (C) (D) is a frame movable as this form It is explanatory drawing in case a frame movable body stands up so that the rear-end part of a body may move ahead and upwards. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the main control board of the same gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the sub control board of the same gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the sub drive board | substrate of the same gaming machine. It is a jackpot type determination table. It is a table | surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a reach determination table, (C) is an ordinary symbol determination table, and (D) is an ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an open pattern determination table of electric Chu. It is a flowchart of a main side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a sub-side 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a drive control process. It is a flowchart of a drive control process. It is a flowchart of a sub-side 10 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a change production start process. It is a disassembled perspective view of the gaming machine frame in the first modification. It is a front view of a gaming machine in the second modification. It is a right view of a gaming machine in the second modification. It is a right view of a game machine in the 3rd modification. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between an inner frame side mounting member, an inner side protruding part, and an outer side protruding part in a 4th modification. It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine when the fall prevention mechanism is in use in the 5th modification from the diagonally upper right.

1. Structure of gaming machine A pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the left-right direction of each part of a pachinko gaming machine as an example of a gaming machine will be described in accordance with the left-right direction for a player facing the pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the front direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described as a direction approaching a player facing the pachinko gaming machine, and the backward direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described as a direction away from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 that forms an outline of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a gaming board 2 that is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50 (see FIG. 27). ) And. The gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame 51, an inner frame 52, and a front frame (glass door frame) 53. The outer frame 51 is a vertical rectangular frame that forms the outline of the gaming machine frame 50. The inner frame 52 is a vertical rectangular frame that is disposed inside the outer frame 51 and to which the game board 2 is attached. The front frame 53 is disposed on the front side of the inner frame 52 and has a vertical rectangular shape that protects the game board 2. A rectangular curtain plate 51 a that is long in the left-right direction is disposed on the front side of the lower end of the outer frame 51. In this embodiment, the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52 correspond to the “base frame portion” of the gaming machine frame 50, and the front frame 53 corresponds to the “front frame portion or the open / close frame portion” of the gaming machine frame 50.

  The gaming machine frame 50 includes an upper hinge mechanism 45 at an upper portion on the left end side, and a lower hinge mechanism 46 (see FIGS. 7, 9, and 11) at a lower portion on the left end side. As shown in FIG. 2, the front frame 53 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52 by the upper hinge mechanism 45 and the lower hinge mechanism 46, respectively. The front frame 53 is freely rotatable. An opening 53a is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and a transparent glass plate 55 (window portion, window member) is attached to the opening 53a. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game area 3 described later through the glass plate 55. The front frame 53 can partition the game board 2 from the external space in a closed state in which the front frame 53 is closed with respect to the inner frame 52. On the other hand, the front frame 53 is rotated from the closed state to the open state opened with respect to the inner frame 52, so that at least the game board surface 2a of the game board 2 can be opened to the outside space.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front frame 53 includes a base frame 56 on the rear side. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the front frame 53 includes an upper decorative portion 200, a left decorative portion 210, a right decorative portion 220, and an operation mechanism portion 230 on the front side. The base frame 56 is a frame that detachably attaches the upper decorative portion 200, the left decorative portion 210, the right decorative portion 220, and the operation mechanism portion 230 on the front side.

  The upper decorative portion (upper decorative portion) 200 decorates the upper portion of the gaming machine frame 50 (front frame 53). As shown in FIG. 3, the upper decorative portion 200 includes a movable body unit 201 at the center in the left-right direction, and light-emitting body units 202L and 202R on both the left and right sides. The movable body unit 201 is a unit that movably assembles a movable frame body 400 described later, and is long in the front-rear direction. A detailed configuration of the movable body unit 201 will be described later. The light emitter units 202L and 202R are units in which a light emitter (not shown) is rotatably mounted inside, and are attached to the base frame 56 in a state of being inclined obliquely upward toward the front (see FIG. 2). ).

  As shown in FIG. 4, the upper decoration part 200 (movable body unit 201) is more than any other part (left decoration part 210, right decoration part 220, operation mechanism part 230) attached to the base frame 56. Protrudes forward. Specifically, the distance L1 from the front end position P1 of the upper decorative portion 200 to the front surface position P2 of the curtain plate 51a of the outer frame 51 (front end position of the curtain plate portion) is about 416.5 mm. In contrast, the distance L2 from the front end position P3 of the operation mechanism 230 to the front position P2 of the curtain plate 51a of the outer frame 51 is about 157.1 mm. Therefore, the distance L1 from the upper decoration part 200 to the outer frame 51 is at least twice the distance L2 from the operation mechanism part 230 to the outer frame 51. Thereby, the protrusion ahead by the upper decoration part 200 is emphasized very much, and it can give a big impact compared with the conventional gaming machine frame.

  The left decoration unit 210 decorates the left side of the gaming machine frame 50 (front frame 53). As shown in FIG. 3, the left decoration unit 210 of this embodiment includes a left first decoration unit 211, a left second decoration unit 212, and a left third decoration unit 213. The right decoration portion 220 decorates the right side of the gaming machine frame 50 and includes a sword member 221 that imitates the shape of a sword and a sheath member 222 that imitates the shape of a sheath. The sword tip portion 221 a of the sword member 221 is accommodated in the sheath member 222 and is movable in the vertical direction with respect to the sheath member 222. Specifically, the sword member 221 is movable to a housing position (see FIG. 4) where the sword tip portion 221a is housed in the sheath member 222 or an exposed position (see FIG. 59) where the sword tip portion 221a is exposed from the sheath member 222. It is. When the sword member 221 is in the exposed position, the player is prompted to push the sword member 221.

  This right decoration part 220 protrudes greatly forward like the upper decoration part 200 described above. Specifically, the distance L3 from the front end position P8 of the right decorative portion 220 to the front position P2 of the curtain plate 51a of the outer frame 51 is about 332.4 mm. Therefore, the distance L3 from the right decoration part 220 to the outer frame 51 is at least twice the distance L2 from the operation mechanism part 230 to the outer frame 51. Thereby, not only the upper decoration part 200 but also the forward protrusion by the right decoration part 220 is emphasized, and it is possible to give a larger impact than the conventional gaming machine frame.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the front surface of the curtain plate 51a is decorated. Originally, the curtain plate 51a is intended to close a gap below the front frame 53 in the gaming machine frame 50 when viewed from the front. That is, when there is no curtain 51a and there is an opening in the gap, the player's belongings and pachinko are placed in the gap, that is, in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 50 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the opening. There is a risk that game balls spilled from the gaming machine 1 will enter. In other words, the function of the curtain plate 51a is sufficient as long as the gap below the front frame 53 in the gaming machine frame 50 can be closed. As described above, since it is not intended for decoration, conventionally, the front surface is flat and has no color or pattern.

  On the other hand, this form uses what was decorated as the curtain board 51a. Specifically, the curtain plate 51a of the present embodiment is provided with a concave portion on the front surface for forming a pattern, and is decorated with a pattern having a shape formed by irregularities. Thereby, the curtain board 51a improves the beauty of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when viewed from the front, together with the front frame 53 having a plurality of decorative portions. The pachinko gaming machine 1 whose aesthetics are improved by the curtain 51a is naturally improved in interest. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a decorated curtain 51a, which is not found in other pachinko gaming machines, is conspicuous in a game hall (hall) where a plurality of various pachinko gaming machines are installed. Therefore, it is possible for a player who is looking for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game hall to easily find the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is also possible to attract the interest of a player who is wondering which pachinko gaming machine is used in the game hall. Note that the curtain plate 51a of this embodiment can be manufactured by resin molding, for example. In the drawings other than FIG. 3, the decoration of the curtain plate 51a may be omitted.

  The operation mechanism unit 230 (game medium storage unit) includes an operation mechanism for progressing games and effects. As shown in FIG. 1, the operation mechanism unit 230 includes a handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the rotation angle at the lower right side, and a batting supply tray ( (Upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 on the left side of the handle 60. Further, an effect button 63 and a select button 68 that can be operated by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses are provided in front of the upper plate 61 in the operation mechanism unit 230.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a front view is shown in FIG. 3, a right side view is shown in FIG. 4, and a plan view is shown in FIG. Here, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a data counter 160 is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the vertical wall surface SH standing in the vertical direction in the island facility of the game arcade. The data counter 160 includes a fixing member 161 fixed to the vertical wall surface SH, and a data display device 162 attached to the fixing member 161 so as to be tilted forward so as to be tilted.

  The data display device 162 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that displays the number of occurrences of a jackpot gaming state, the number of occurrences of a high probability state, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the data display device 162 has a call button or the like for the player to call the hall employee. In the data counter 160, the forward tilt angle θ of the data display device 162 with respect to the vertical wall surface SH can be varied from 15 degrees to 25 degrees. FIG. 4 shows a state where the forward tilt angle θ of the data display device 162 is the maximum 25 degrees.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, a pair of left and right left speakers 67L and 67R are provided on the rear side and the lower side of the upper decorative portion 200. The upper decoration unit 200, the left decoration unit 210, the right decoration unit 220, and the operation mechanism unit 230 are provided with a large number of frame lamps 66 (see FIG. 65) that can emit light in various emission colors.

  Next, the configuration of the upper hinge mechanism 45 and the lower hinge mechanism 46 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper hinge mechanism 45 includes an outer frame side connecting member 45a shown in FIG. 7, an upper hinge pin 45b shown in FIG. 8A, an inner frame side attaching member 45c shown in FIG. 9, and a front frame side attaching member (not shown). I have. Each of the outer frame side connecting member 45a, the inner frame side mounting member 45c, and the front frame side mounting member is made of a steel plate (sheet metal).

  Here, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the outer frame 51. 8A is an enlarged perspective view of a portion B in FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged perspective view of a portion C in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the outer frame 51 includes an upper side 51U extending in the left-right direction on the upper side, a lower side part 51D extending in the left-right direction on the lower side, a left side 51L extending in the up-down direction on the left side, and a vertical direction on the right side. And a right side portion 51 </ b> R extending to the right side. The above-described curtain plate 51a is attached to the front side of the lower side portion 51D.

  The outer frame side connecting member 45a shown in FIG. 7 is a member that rotatably attaches the inner frame side attaching member 45c. As shown in FIG. 8A, the outer frame side connecting member 45a includes a connecting portion 45a1 formed in a substantially L shape and a mounting portion 45a2 extending forward from the connecting portion 45a1. The connecting portion 45a1 is fixed to the left end of the upper side 51U of the outer frame 51 and the upper end of the left side 51L via screws. The attachment portion 45a2 has a portion that is vertical in front of the outer frame 51 and a portion that is horizontal. The upper hinge pin 45b extending in the vertical direction is inserted from above in the horizontal portion of the attachment portion 45a2.

  FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the inner frame 52. 10A is an enlarged perspective view of a portion D in FIG. 9, and FIG. 10B is an enlarged perspective view of a portion E in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 52 includes a substantially rectangular holding frame 58 on the front side. The holding frame 58 includes an upper part 58U extending in the left-right direction on the upper side, a lower side part 58D extending in the left-right direction on the lower side, a left side part 58L extending in the up-down direction on the left side, and a right side part 58R extending in the up-down direction on the right side. It has.

  The inner frame side attachment member 45c shown in FIG. 9 is rotatably attached to the attachment portion 45a2 of the outer frame side connection member 45a. As shown in FIG. 10A, the inner frame side mounting member 45c is fixed to the left end of the upper portion 58U and the upper end of the left side portion 58L of the holding frame 58, and is substantially connected forward of the inner frame 52. It has a letter shape. As a result, the mounting portion 45a2 of the outer frame side connecting member 45a is fitted in the U-shaped portion of the inner frame side mounting member 45c, and the upper hinge pin 45b is inserted from above. As a result, the upper left portion of the inner frame 52 is rotatable about the rotation center H1 of the upper hinge pin 45b with respect to the upper left portion of the outer frame 51.

  Further, the inner frame side attachment member 45c is a member that rotatably attaches a front frame side attachment member (not shown). The front frame side mounting member is fixed to the upper left part of the base frame 56 (see FIG. 11) of the front frame 53. In the inner frame side mounting member 45c, a front frame side mounting member is arranged below the U-shaped portion, and a hinge pin (not shown) is inserted from below. As a result, the upper left portion of the front frame 53 is rotatable with respect to the upper left portion of the inner frame 52.

  The lower hinge mechanism 46 (hinge means) includes an outer frame side support member 46a shown in FIG. 7, a lower hinge pin 46b shown in FIG. 8B, an inner frame side mounting member 46c shown in FIG. 9 and an inner frame side support member 46d shown in FIG. 9 and a front frame side mounting member 46e shown in FIG. The outer frame side support member 46a, the inner frame side mounting member 46c, the inner frame side support member 46d, and the front frame side mounting member 46e are made of steel plates (sheet metal).

  The outer frame side support member 46a (fixed side hinge member) shown in FIG. 7 rotatably supports the inner frame side mounting member 46c, the inner frame side support member 46d, and the front frame side mounting member 46e. is there. As shown in FIG. 8B, the outer frame side support member 46a includes an upper surface portion 46a1 (planar portion) that is planar (horizontal) on the upper side, and an outer frame 51 at the rear end. It is fixed to the left end of the lower side 51D via a screw. Further, in the outer frame side support member 46a, a lower hinge pin 46b extending in the vertical direction is inserted from below at a portion in front of the curtain plate 51a.

  The inner frame side mounting member 46c (rotation side hinge member) shown in FIG. 9 is rotatably attached while being supported by the outer frame side support member 46a. As shown in FIG. 10B, the inner frame side mounting member 46c extends horizontally below the inner frame side support member 46d, and the lower side portion 58D of the holding frame 58 at the rear end portion. It is fixed to the left end of With the inner frame side mounting member 46c mounted on the upper side of the outer frame side support member 46a, the lower hinge pin 46b is inserted from below. As a result, the lower left portion of the inner frame 52 is rotatable around the rotation center H1 of the lower hinge pin 46b with respect to the lower left portion of the outer frame 51. Since the upper hinge pin 45b and the lower hinge pin 46b described above are arranged coaxially, they have the same rotation center H1.

  The inner frame side support member 46d shown in FIG. 9 supports the front frame side mounting member 46e so as to be rotatable. As shown in FIG. 10B, the inner frame side support member 46d includes a horizontal portion 46d1 that is horizontal and an upright portion 46d2 that rises upward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 46d1. . The horizontal portion 46d1 is arranged in parallel with the above-described inner frame side mounting member 46c, and has an L-shaped raised portion 46h described later. The standing portion 46d2 is fixed to the left end of the lower portion 58D of the holding frame 58.

  Here, FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the base frame 56 of the front frame 53. The base frame 56 attaches the upper decoration part 200, the left decoration part 210, the right decoration part 220, and the operation mechanism part 230 on the front side. As shown in FIG. 11, an opening 53a for attaching the glass plate 55 described above is formed at the center of the base frame 56 (see FIG. 2). A front frame side mounting member 46 e is fixed to the lower left end of the base frame 56.

  The front frame side mounting member 46e is rotatably attached while being supported by the inner frame side support member 46d (see FIG. 14). The front frame side mounting member 46e extends horizontally from the base frame 56 toward the front, and has a hinge hole 46j into which the lower hinge pin 46b can be inserted at the front end. Thus, with the front frame side mounting member 46e mounted on the inner frame side support member 46d and the inner frame side mounting member 46c mounted on the upper side of the outer frame side support member 46a as described above, The lower hinge pin 46b is inserted from below. As a result, the lower left portion of the front frame 53 is rotatable about the rotation center H1 of the lower hinge pin 46b with respect to the lower left portion of the inner frame 52 and the lower left portion of the outer frame 51.

  By the way, on the upper surface portion 46a1 of the outer frame side support member 46a shown in FIG. 7, the weight of the front frame 53 provided with the upper decoration portion 200, the weight of the inner frame 52 provided with the game board 2, and the like are shown in FIG. It acts via the side mounting member 46c. Further, the weight of the front frame 53 provided with the upper decorative portion 200 acts on the inner frame side support member 46d shown in FIG. 10B via the front frame side mounting member 46e. Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper decorative portion 200 protrudes greatly toward the front, and is much heavier than a conventional general upper decorative portion. Therefore, the outer frame side support member 46a must support the inner frame side mounting member 46c so as to be rotatable while receiving a very large load. Similarly, the inner frame side support member 46d must rotatably support the front frame side mounting member 46e while receiving a very large load.

  However, if the upper surface portion 46a1 of the outer frame side support member 46a is formed on a horizontal plane, the following problems may occur. That is, when the opening / closing operation of the inner frame 52 with respect to the outer frame 51 is repeated, the upper surface portion 46a1 of the outer frame side support member 46a and the horizontal surface below the inner frame side mounting member 46c are in surface contact with each other. You can sharpen with. In this case, if scraping other than the horizontal plane occurs, the sliding resistance (friction resistance) becomes excessively large, and there is a possibility that the opening / closing operation of the inner frame 52 with respect to the outer frame 51 becomes difficult. Further, when the inner frame 52 rotates while being slightly inclined with respect to the outer frame 51, the inner frame side mounting member 46c slides while locally contacting the upper surface portion 46a1 of the outer frame side support member 46a. Then, an extremely large support reaction force is received at an unintended location on the upper surface portion 46a1 of the outer frame side support member 46a. As a result, the upper surface portion 46a1 of the outer frame side support member 46a may be damaged or cracked.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, the upper surface portion 46a1 of the outer frame side support member 46a is formed with an inner raised portion 46f that is raised in an arc shape in the longitudinal section (FIG. 13 ( C)). In other words, the upper surface portion 46a1 of the outer frame side support member 46a is formed not to be a horizontal surface but to form a raised portion. Thereby, when the opening / closing operation | movement with respect to the outer frame 51 of the inner frame 52 is performed, it is possible to reduce the contact surface (part by surface contact) of the outer frame side supporting member 46a and the inner frame side mounting member 46c. . As a result, it is difficult for the sheet metal to be scraped by surface contact, and the opening / closing operation of the inner frame 52 with respect to the outer frame 51 can be prevented. Further, even if the inner frame 52 rotates with a slight inclination with respect to the outer frame 51, the inner frame side mounting member 46c can be slid while being brought into contact with the inner raised portion 46f. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an extremely large support reaction force acting locally at an unintended portion of the inner frame side mounting member 46c. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the inner frame side mounting member 46c to be damaged or cracked.

  The above-described problem can also occur in the relationship between the inner frame side support member 46d and the front frame side mounting member 46e. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, an L-shaped raised portion 46h that is raised in an arc shape in the longitudinal section is formed in the horizontal portion 46d1 of the inner frame side support member 46d. Thereby, when the opening / closing operation | movement with respect to the inner frame 52 of the front frame 53 is performed, the contact surface (part by surface contact) of the horizontal part 46d1 of the inner frame side supporting member 46d and the front frame side mounting member 46e is reduced. Is possible. As a result, it is difficult for the sheet metal to be scraped by surface contact, and it is possible to prevent the opening / closing operation of the front frame 53 with respect to the inner frame 52 from becoming difficult. Further, even if the front frame 53 rotates with a slight inclination with respect to the inner frame 52, the front frame side mounting member 46e is slid while being brought into contact with the first raised portion 46h1 of the L-shaped raised portion 46h. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an extremely large support reaction force from acting locally at an unintended portion of the front frame side mounting member 46e. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the front frame side mounting member 46e to be damaged or cracked.

  In this embodiment, the inner raised portion 46f, the outer raised portion 46g described later, and the L-shaped raised portion 46h are formed by extrusion molding of sheet metal. However, the inner raised portion 46f, the outer raised portion 46g described later, and the L-shaped raised portion 46h may be formed by other methods such as welding and bonding, and can be changed as appropriate.

  Here, based on FIG. 8 (B), the outer frame side support member 46a of this form is demonstrated in detail. As described above, the upper surface portion 46a1 and the inner raised portion 46f of the outer frame side support member 46a are formed. The inner raised portion 46f (convex portion) supports the inner frame side mounting member 46c so as to be slidable. The inner raised portion 46f is raised in an arc shape in the longitudinal section as described above. Thereby, it is possible to make point contact in the longitudinal section, and it is possible to reduce sliding friction acting on the inner frame side mounting member 46c compared to the case of surface contact.

  Further, in the inner raised portion 46f, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 13C, the front end portion 46f1 is lower in the vertical direction than the portion located behind the front end portion 46f1. In addition, the curvature in the longitudinal section is formed to be small. As a result, the inner frame 52 is rotated so as to be closed with respect to the outer frame 51, and when the inner frame side mounting member 46c rides on the front end portion 46f1, as shown in FIG. It is possible to make the placement member 46c easy to get on. That is, it is possible to smoothly ride on the inner frame side mounting member 46c by the front end portion 46f1 which is low and has a small curvature.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, the inner raised portion 46f is formed in an arc shape in a plan view. However, the inner raised portion 46f is not formed along the concentric circle GA (see the two-dot chain line) around the rotation center H1. That is, the distance V1 between the most raised portion (the apex of the arc portion) of the inner raised portion 46f and the rotation center H1 is formed to be different along the longitudinal direction of the inner raised portion 46f. Specifically, the above-described distance V1 becomes longer from the front side to the rear side in the inner raised portion 46f.

  Here, a case where the opening / closing angle α (see FIG. 2) of the inner frame 52 with respect to the outer frame 51 is changed so as to be gradually reduced will be described based on FIGS. 12 (A), 12B, and 12C. First, as shown in FIG. 12A, when the opening / closing angle α is relatively large α1, the rear edge portion 46c1 of the inner frame side mounting member 46c starts to ride on the front end portion 46f1 of the inner raised portion 46f. At this time, the distance V1 from the portion of the rear edge 46c1 supported by the inner raised portion 46f to the rotation center H1 is relatively small V1a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12B, the inner frame 52 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 12A so that the opening / closing angle α becomes α2 smaller than α1 described above. At this time, the distance V1 from the portion of the rear edge 46c1 supported by the inner raised portion 46f to the rotation center H1 is V1b, which is larger than V1a described above.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 12C, the inner frame 52 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 12B so that the opening / closing angle α becomes α3 smaller than α2 described above. At this time, the distance V1 from the portion of the rear edge 46c1 supported by the inner raised portion 46f to the rotation center H1 is V1c larger than the above-described V1b.

  As can be seen from the above description, the inner raised portion 46f is not formed along the concentric circle GA around the rotation center H1 (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 8B), so that the outer frame 51 of the inner frame 52 is formed. With the rotation with respect to the inner frame side placement member 46c, it is possible to change the portion supported by the inner raised portion 46f. Here, as a comparative example, a case will be described in which the inner raised portion 46z (see FIG. 13A) is formed along a concentric circle GA around the rotation center H1.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, in the comparative example, even if the inner frame 52 rotates with respect to the outer frame 51, the portion of the inner frame side mounting member 46c that is supported by the inner raised portion 46z is It will always be the same. Therefore, a large support reaction force always acts on that portion, and the inner frame side mounting member 46c is greatly shaved locally.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13B, in this embodiment, the inner frame 52 is supported by the inner raised portion 46f of the inner frame side mounting member 46c as the inner frame 52 rotates with respect to the outer frame 51. The part changes. Therefore, it is possible to avoid always receiving a large support reaction force at the same location. As a result, it is possible to avoid a large portion of the inner frame side mounting member 46c from being sharply cut as in the comparative example.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, the inner raised portion 46f is formed in an arc shape in plan view. The center of the radius of curvature of the inner raised portion 46f is provided on the rotation center H1 side and in the vicinity of the rotation center H1. That is, the inner raised portion 46f is not along the concentric circle GA around the rotation center H1, but has an approximate arc shape along the concentric circle GA. As a result, when the inner frame side mounting member 46c rotates around the rotation center H1 while being supported by the inner raised portion 46f, the sliding resistance (friction resistance) can be reduced as much as possible. In FIG. 8B, the concentric circle GA (see the two-dot chain line G1) with respect to the rotation center H1 is also the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation center H1.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, the front end portion 46f1 of the inner raised portion 46f is formed along the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation center H1. As a result, the inner frame 52 is rotated so as to be closed with respect to the outer frame 51, and when the inner frame side mounting member 46c rides on the front end portion 46f1, as shown in FIG. It is possible to make the placement member 46c easy to get on. That is, it is possible to smoothly run the inner frame side mounting member 46c as compared with the case where the front end portion 46f1 of the inner raised portion 46f is not along the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation center H1.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, an outer raised portion 46g (another convex portion) is formed on the upper surface portion 46a1 of the outer frame side support member 46a. The outer protruding portion 46g is provided at a position farther from the rotation center H1 than the inner protruding portion 46f, and supports the inner frame side mounting member 46c to be slidable. The outer raised portion 46g is raised in an arc shape in the longitudinal section. The outer raised portion 46g is linearly formed in the front-rear direction in a plan view, and is not formed along the concentric circle GA around the rotation center H1 like the inner raised portion 46f. That is, the distance V2 from the most raised portion (the apex of the arc portion) of the outer raised portion 46g to the rotation center H1 is formed to be different along the longitudinal direction of the outer raised portion 46g. Therefore, the outer raised portion 46g can also exhibit the same function as the inner raised portion 46f.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the inner frame side mounting member 46c can be slidably supported at the two positions of the outer protruding portion 46g and the inner protruding portion 46f, the sliding of the inner frame side mounting member 46c can be further stabilized. Is possible. Further, in the outer protruding portion 46g, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 13C, the front end portion 46g1 is smaller in height in the vertical direction than the portion located behind the front end portion 46g1, And it is formed so that the curvature in a longitudinal section becomes small. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to ride the inner frame side mounting member 46c even at the front end portion 46g1 of the outer protruding portion 46g.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the inner raised portion 46f and the outer raised portion 46g are rotated so as to close the inner frame 52 relative to the outer frame 51, the inner raised portion 46f and the outer raised portion 46g are mounted on the inner frame side. The mounting member 46c is formed such that the distance between the position supported by the inner raised portion 46f and the position supported by the outer raised portion 46g gradually increases. That is, with respect to the inner frame side mounting member 46c supported at two locations, the distance between the two supported locations increases as the opening / closing angle α decreases. Thereby, immediately before closing the inner frame 52 with respect to the outer frame 51, it is possible to slide the inner frame side mounting member 46c in a more stable state.

  Next, based on FIG. 10 (B), the horizontal part 46d1 of the inner frame side support member 46d of this embodiment will be described in detail. The horizontal portion 46d1 of the inner frame side support member 46d is formed with an L-shaped raised portion 46h. The L-shaped raised portion 46h includes a first raised portion 46h1 that extends substantially in the left-right direction and a second raised portion 46h2 that extends substantially in the front-rear direction. The first raised portion 46h1 supports the front frame side mounting member 46e so as to be slidable. The first raised portion 46h1 is raised in an arc shape in the longitudinal section. Thereby, it is possible to make point contact in the longitudinal section, and it is possible to reduce sliding friction of the front frame side mounting member 46e supported by the first raised portion 46h1 as compared with the case of surface contact.

  Moreover, the 1st protruding part 46h1 is formed in circular arc shape by planar view, as shown to FIG. 10 (B). However, the first raised portion 46h1 is not formed along the concentric circle GB around the rotation center H1. That is, the distance W1 between the most raised portion (the top of the arc portion) of the first raised portion 46h1 and the rotation center H1 is formed to be different along the longitudinal direction of the first raised portion 46h1. . Specifically, the above-described distance W1 decreases from the right side to the left side in the first raised portion 46h1.

  Here, a case where the opening / closing angle β (see FIG. 2) of the front frame 53 with respect to the inner frame 52 is changed so as to gradually decrease will be described with reference to FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 14A, when the opening / closing angle β is relatively large β1, the rear edge 46e1 of the front frame side mounting member 46e is a front end portion 46h3 of the L-shaped raised portion 46h (first A portion that is the front end of the raised portion 46h1 and the front end of the second raised portion 46h2 is started. At this time, the distance W1 from the portion of the rear edge 46e1 supported by the first raised portion 46h1 to the rotation center H1 is relatively large W1a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14B, the front frame 53 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 14A so that the opening / closing angle β becomes β2 smaller than β1 described above. At this time, the distance W1 from the portion of the rear edge 46e1 supported by the first raised portion 46h1 to the rotation center H1 is W1b, which is smaller than W1a.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 14C, the front frame 53 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 14B so that the opening / closing angle β becomes β3 smaller than β2 described above. At this time, the distance W1 from the portion of the rear edge 46e1 supported by the first raised portion 46h1 to the rotation center H1 is W1c smaller than the above-described W1b.

  As can be seen from the above description, the first raised portion 46h1 is not formed along the concentric circle GA around the rotation center H1, so that the front frame 53 is mounted on the front frame side as the front frame 53 rotates with respect to the inner frame 52. It is possible to change the portion of the mounting member 46e that is supported by the first raised portion 46h1. Thereby, it is possible for the front frame side mounting member 46e to avoid receiving a large support reaction force from the inner frame side support member 46d at the same location. As a result, it is possible to avoid that a certain portion of the front frame side mounting member 46e is greatly shaved.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the first raised portion 46h1 is formed in an arc shape in plan view. The center of the radius of curvature of the first raised portion 46h1 is provided on the rotation center H1 side and in the vicinity of the rotation center H1. That is, the first raised portion 46h1 is not formed along the concentric circle GB around the rotation center H1, but has an approximate arc shape along the concentric circle GB. Thereby, when the front frame side mounting member 46e rotates around the rotation center H1 while being supported by the first raised portion 46h1, it is possible to reduce the sliding resistance (friction resistance) as much as possible. In FIG. 10B, the concentric circle GB (see the two-dot chain line) with respect to the rotation center H1 is also the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation center H1.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 (B), not only the first raised portion 46h1 but also the second raised portion 46h2 is formed in the L-shaped raised portion 46h. The second raised portion 46h2 is provided at a position farther from the rotation center H1 than the first raised portion 46h1, and supports the front frame side mounting member 46e in a slidable manner. The second raised portion 46h2 is raised in an arc shape in the longitudinal section. And the 2nd protruding part 46h2 is extended in the front-back direction in planar view, and is not formed along the concentric circle GB around the rotation center H1 like the 1st protruding part 46h1. That is, the distance W2 from the most raised portion (the apex of the arc portion) of the second raised portion 46h2 to the rotation center H1 is formed to be different along the longitudinal direction of the second raised portion 46h2. . Therefore, the second raised portion 46h2 can also exhibit the same function as the first raised portion 46h1.

  In this manner, in this embodiment, the front frame side mounting member 46e (front frame 53) can be slidably supported at two locations, the first raised portion 46h1 and the second raised portion 46h2, so that the sliding of the front frame 53 is more stable. It is possible to make it. As shown in FIG. 10B, the front end portion 46h3 of the L-shaped raised portion 46h is formed along the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation center H1. Accordingly, the front frame 53 is rotated so as to be closed with respect to the inner frame 52, and the front frame side mounting member 46e rides on the front end portion 46h3 as shown in FIG. It is possible to make it easier to ride the mounting member 46e. That is, it is possible to smoothly ride on the front frame side mounting member 46e as compared with the case where the front end portion 46h3 of the L-shaped raised portion 46h is not along the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation center H1.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the first raised portion 46h1 and the second raised portion 46h2 are arranged so that the front frame 53 is rotated when the front frame 53 is closed with respect to the inner frame 52. 53, the distance between the position supported by the first raised portion 46h1 and the position supported by the second raised portion 46h2 is gradually increased. That is, with respect to the front frame 53 supported at two locations, the distance between the two supported locations increases as the opening / closing angle β decreases. Thereby, it is possible to slide the front frame 53 in a more stable state immediately before closing the front frame 53 with respect to the inner frame 52.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, since the horizontal portion 46d1 of the inner frame side support member 46d is small, the first raised portion 46h1 and the second raised portion 46h2 are connected by the front end portion 46h3. However, the horizontal portion 46d1 of the inner frame side support member 46d is enlarged so that the first raised portion 46h1 and the second raised portion 46h2 are made like the inner raised portion 46f and the outer raised portion 46g shown in FIG. 8B. It may be separated.

  Next, based on FIGS. 15-19, the structure for maintaining the closed state with respect to the inner frame 52 of the front frame 53 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 2, the front frame 53 and the inner frame 52 face each other at the upper, lower, left, and right edges when in the closed state. Specifically, the upper and lower edges 56U (see FIG. 11) of the base frame 56 of the front frame 53 and the upper part 58U (see FIG. 9) of the holding frame 58 of the inner frame 52 are provided at the upper, lower, left and right edges. There is an opposing upper facing edge. Further, there is a lower facing edge portion where the lower edge portion 56D (see FIG. 11) of the base frame 56 and the lower portion 58D (see FIG. 9) of the holding frame 58 face each other. Further, there is a left-side facing edge portion where the left-side edge portion 56L (see FIG. 11) of the base frame 56 and the left-side portion 58L (see FIG. 9) of the holding frame 58 face each other. In addition, there is a right facing edge (free end edge) where the right edge 56R (see FIG. 11) of the base frame 56 and the right edge 58R (see FIG. 9) of the holding frame 58 face each other. These opposing edges correspond to “upper and lower left and right opposing edges where the inner frame 52 and the front frame 53 face each other”.

  A normal lock mechanism 47 for maintaining the closed state of the front frame 53 with respect to the inner frame 52 is provided at the right-side facing edge described above. Hereinafter, the normal lock mechanism 47 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. As shown in FIG. 15, the normal lock mechanism 47 mainly includes a right fixed frame 74 and an upper and lower slide frame 75.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the right fixed frame 74 is a frame that is long in the vertical direction, and is fixed to the right side 58R (see FIG. 9) of the holding frame 58 of the inner frame 52. The right fixed frame 74 is provided with a first insertion hole 74a, a second insertion hole 74b, a third insertion hole 74c, and a fourth insertion hole 74d in order from the bottom to the top.

  The first insertion hole 74a penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is for inserting a first locking piece 75a of an upper and lower slide frame 75 described later. The 2nd penetration hole 74b penetrates in the front-back direction, and is for inserting the 2nd locking piece 75b of the up-and-down slide frame 75 mentioned below. The 3rd penetration hole 74c penetrates in the direction of order, and is for inserting the 3rd stop piece 75c of the up-and-down slide frame 75 mentioned below. The fourth insertion hole 74d penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is for inserting a fourth locking piece 75d of an upper and lower slide frame 75 described later. These insertion holes 74a, 74b, 74c, and 74d are vertically moved so that the first locking piece 75a, the second locking piece 75b, the third locking piece 75c, and the fourth locking piece 75d can move in the vertical direction. It is long in the direction.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, the vertical slide frame 75 is a frame that is long in the vertical direction, and is slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the right fixed frame 74. FIG. 16B shows a state in which the right fixed frame 74 shown in FIG. 16A is removed. The upper and lower slide frames 75 are provided with a first locking piece 75a, a second locking piece 75b, a third locking piece 75c, and a fourth locking piece 75d in order from the bottom to the top. The first locking piece 75a, the second locking piece 75b, the third locking piece 75c, and the fourth locking piece 75d are respectively a first insertion hole 74a, a second insertion hole 74b, a third insertion hole 74c, It is inserted through the four insertion holes 74d and protrudes forward.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 16A, an upper fixture 76 a is attached to the upper portion of the right side fixing frame 74. As shown in FIG. 18A, the upper fixing member 76a is for attaching the upper coil spring 76b. The upper coil spring 76 b extends in the vertical direction, the lower end portion of the upper coil spring 76 b is attached to the upper fixture 76 a, and the upper end portion of the upper coil spring 76 b is attached to the upper and lower slide frame 75. As a result, the upper and lower slide frames 75 can slide upward against the urging force of the upper coil spring 76b.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, a lower coil spring 76c is attached to the lower portion of the right fixed frame 74 via a lower fixture (not shown). A lower end portion of the lower coil spring 76 c is attached to the lower fixture, and an upper end portion of the lower coil spring 76 c is attached to the vertical slide frame 75.

  Thus, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 16A, the locking pieces 75a, 75b, 75c, and 75d of the upper and lower slide frames 75 are in contact with the lower ends of the insertion holes 74a, 74b, 74c, and 74d, respectively. ing. On the other hand, the upper and lower slide frames 75 are moved up to the upper coil springs 76b until the locking pieces 75a, 75b, 75c, and 75d of the upper and lower slide frames 75 come into contact with the upper ends of the insertion holes 74a, 74b, 74c, and 74d, respectively. The upper coil spring 76c can be slid upward against the urging force of the lower coil spring 76c.

  As shown in FIG. 11, on the right side of the base frame 56 of the front frame 53, the first locking hole 56b, the second locking hole 56c, the third locking hole 56d, A fourth locking hole 56e is provided. The first locking hole 56b, the second locking hole 56c, the third locking hole 56d, and the fourth locking hole 56e pass through in the front-rear direction, and the first locking piece 75a of the upper and lower slide frame 75, This is for locking the second locking piece 75b, the third locking piece 75c, and the fourth locking piece 75d.

  Thus, when the front frame 53 is closed with respect to the inner frame 52, the locking pieces 75a, 75b, 75c, and 75d of the upper and lower slide frames 75 are inserted into the locking holes 56b, 56c, 56d, and 56e of the base frame 56, respectively. It moves slightly upward while contacting. Thereafter, the locking pieces 75a, 75b, 75c, and 75d move downward and lock into the locking holes 56b, 56c, 56d, and 56e. That is, the locking pieces 75a, 75b, 75c, and 75d are hooked to the front side of the locking holes 56b, 56c, 56d, and 56e. As a result, the closed state of the front frame 53 with respect to the inner frame 52 can be maintained.

  Next, the locking device 48 capable of releasing the closed state of the front frame 53 with respect to the inner frame 52 will be described. As shown in FIG. 15 and FIGS. 16A and 16B, the locking device 48 (close release device) is provided at the lower part of the right fixed frame 74 and covers the locking device main body 48a and the locking device main body 48a. And a locking device cover 48b. The locking device body 48a includes a cylinder member having a key hole, and a key (not shown) can be inserted into the key hole. In the locking device main body 48a, the upper and lower slide frames 75 can be slid upward when the key is turned counterclockwise with the key inserted through the keyhole.

  That is, when the front frame 53 is closed with respect to the inner frame 52, the upper and lower slide frames 75 slide upward when the key is turned leftward (counterclockwise) with the key inserted through the keyhole. Thereby, each locking piece 75a, 75b, 75c, 75d of the up-and-down slide frame 75 moves upward. As a result, it is possible to unlock the locking pieces 75c, 75b, 75c, 75d and the locking holes 56b, 56c, 56d, 56e. When the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame, the closed state of the inner frame 52 with respect to the outer frame 51 can be released by turning the key clockwise (clockwise) with the key inserted through the keyhole. It has become.

  By the way, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper decoration part 200 protrudes greatly toward the front, and is much heavier than a conventional general upper decoration part. Therefore, the front side of the upper decorative part 200 (the upper part of the front frame 53) is likely to hang down. Therefore, it is desirable to strengthen the closed state between the upper part of the front frame 53 and the upper part of the inner frame 52.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special lock mechanism 49 is provided on the upper facing edge portion among the upper, lower, left and right facing edges where the inner frame 52 and the front frame 53 face each other. The special lock mechanism 49 (upper lock mechanism) is for strengthening the closed state between the upper part of the front frame 53 and the upper part of the inner frame 52. Hereinafter, the special lock mechanism 49 will be described with reference to FIGS. The special lock mechanism 49 mainly includes a rotating piece 77, an upper fixed frame 78, and a left and right slide frame 79.

  As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, the rotating piece 77 is disposed between the upper end of the upper and lower slide frames 75 and the right end of the left and right slide frames 79. The rotation piece 77 is assembled so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 17B, the rotating piece 77 is formed with a first protrusion 77a extending forward and a second protrusion 77b extending upward. The first protrusion 77a is disposed below the engagement pin 75d1 extending leftward from the fourth locking piece 75d. The second protrusion 77b is disposed on the right side of the left and right slide frame 79.

  Therefore, when the vertical slide frame 75 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 17B, the engagement pin 75d1 of the fourth locking piece 75d pushes the first protrusion 77a upward. Thereby, the rotation piece 77 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front. As a result, the second protrusion 77b pushes the right end of the left and right slide frame 79 to the left, so that the left and right slide frame 79 can slide to the left.

  As shown in FIGS. 18B and 19, the upper fixed frame 78 is a frame that is long in the left-right direction, and is fixed to the upper portion 58U (see FIG. 9) of the holding frame 58 of the inner frame 52. is there. A first guide pin 78a, a second guide pin 78b, and a third guide pin 78c are attached to the upper fixed frame 78 in order from the right to the left.

  The first guide pin 78a extends downward from the upper fixed frame 78 and is inserted into a first slide hole 79a of a left and right slide frame 79 described later. The second guide pin 78b extends downward from the upper fixed frame 78 and is inserted into a second slide hole 79b of a left and right slide frame 79 described later. The third guide pin 78c extends downward from the upper fixed frame 78 and is inserted into a third slide hole 79c of the left and right slide frame 79 described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 18B and 19, the left / right slide frame 79 is a frame that is long in the left / right direction, and is slidable in the left / right direction below the upper fixed frame 78. The left and right slide frames 79 are provided with a first slide hole 79a, a second slide hole 79b, and a third slide hole 79c in order from the right to the left. The left / right slide frame 79 is attached to a coil spring (not shown) extending in the left / right direction. When the left / right slide frame 79 moves (slides) to the left, it receives a biasing force from the coil spring to the right.

  The first slide hole 79a penetrates in the vertical direction and passes through the first guide pin 78a. The second slide hole 79b penetrates in the vertical direction and passes through the second guide pin 78b. The third slide hole 79c penetrates in the vertical direction and is inserted through the third guide pin 78c. These slide holes 79a, 79b, 79c are formed long in the left-right direction so that the guide pins 78a, 78b, 78c can move in the left-right direction, respectively.

  Thus, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 19A, the left ends of the slide holes 79a, 79b, 79c of the left and right slide frames 79 are in contact with the guide pins 78a, 78b, 78c. Then, as described above, when the right end of the left and right slide frame 79 is pushed to the left by the rotation of the rotation piece 77, the right end of each slide hole 79a, 79b, 79c corresponds to each guide pin 78a. , 78b, 78c, and can slide leftward.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18B, a substantially rectangular opening 78d is provided in front of the third guide pin 78c in the upper fixed frame 78. In addition, an L-shaped portion 79d bent in a substantially L shape is provided in front of the third slide hole 79c in the left and right slide frames 79. The L-shaped portion 79d (locking portion) is disposed behind the left end side of the opening 78d and is for locking with a special locking piece 56f described later.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, a special locking piece 56f is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion of the base frame 56 (front frame 53). The special locking piece 56 f (insertion convex portion) protrudes rearward and can be inserted into the opening 78 d (insertion concave portion) of the upper fixed frame 78. Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the special locking piece 56f is thinner toward the front end side (rear end side) and has an inclined portion 56f1 on the left side.

  When the front frame 53 is closed with respect to the inner frame 52, the special locking piece 56f is inserted into the opening 78d of the upper fixed frame 78, and the inclined portion 56f1 of the special locking piece 56f is L of the left and right slide frame 79. It abuts on the character 79d. As a result, the L-shaped portion 79d moves slightly to the left against the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). Thereafter, when the special locking piece 56f is inserted until the inclined portion 56f1 and the L-shaped portion 79d do not contact each other, the L-shaped portion 79d returns to the original position by the biasing force of the coil spring.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 19, the special locking piece 56 f is locked to the L-shaped portion 79 d of the left and right slide frame 79. That is, the special locking piece 56f is hooked on the L-shaped portion 79d. As a result, as described above, not only the normal lock mechanism 47 but also the special lock mechanism 49 can maintain the closed state of the front frame 53 with respect to the inner frame 52. Therefore, the closed state of the upper part of the front frame 53 and the upper part of the inner frame 52 can be strengthened, and the front side of the upper decorative part 200 (the upper part of the front frame 53) can be made difficult to hang down. .

  Then, the special lock mechanism 49 includes a central portion 53M in the left-right direction among the upper facing edge portions where the upper edge portion 56U of the base frame 56 of the front frame 53 and the upper portion 58U of the holding frame 58 of the inner frame 52 face each other. 2). On the other hand, as will be described later, a very heavy movable body unit 201 (about 6.5 kg) in the upper decorative portion 200 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the upper edge portion 56U of the base frame 56 ( (See FIG. 33). Therefore, even if a large front load is applied to the movable body unit 201, it is possible to effectively suppress the upper edge portion 56U of the front frame 53 from opening forward by the special lock mechanism 49 provided in the immediate vicinity. . As a result, it is possible to make the front side of the movable body unit 201 difficult to hang.

  Next, release of the closed state (closed state of the front frame 53 with respect to the inner frame 52) by the special lock mechanism 49 will be described. In this embodiment, when the front frame 53 is closed with respect to the inner frame 52, if the key is turned counterclockwise with the key inserted through the keyhole with respect to the locking device body 48 a (based on a specific operation), The slide frame 75 slides upward. Thereby, the closed state by the normal lock mechanism 47 can be canceled as described above. At this time, as the upper and lower slide frames 75 move upward, the rotating piece 77 rotates and the left and right slide frames 79 slide to the left. Thereby, the L-shaped portion 79d of the left and right slide frame 79 moves leftward from the state shown in FIG. 19, and the locking between the special locking piece 56f and the L-shaped portion 79d is released. In this way, the closed state by the special lock mechanism 49 can be released.

  In short, when the front frame 53 is closed with respect to the inner frame 52, if the key is rotated counterclockwise with the key inserted through the keyhole with respect to the locking device 48, the closed state by the normal lock mechanism 47 can be released. In addition, the closed state by the special lock mechanism 49 can also be released. Therefore, it is possible to open the front frame 53 with respect to the inner frame 52 without requiring a new operation, just by turning the key leftward with the key inserted through the keyhole as in the conventional case. In other words, when the front frame 53 is opened by using the existing locking device 48 without providing a dedicated locking device for releasing the closed state by the special lock mechanism 49, the employee of the game hall (hall) It is possible to prevent an increase in the work burden on the staff.

  By the way, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper decoration part 200 protrudes greatly toward the front, and the movable body unit 201 and the light emitter units 202L and 202R are mounted on the upper decoration part 200. Yes. As will be described later, the movable body unit 201 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction, and has a weight of about 6.5 kg. The light emitter units 202L and 202R have a weight of about 3 kg. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, a large heavy object is mounted on the upper front side, and the total weight exceeds about 50 kg. Therefore, this pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem that it is easy to tip over.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from tipping forward, as shown in FIG. 6, the operation mechanism unit 230 is provided with a tipping prevention mechanism 95. Below, the fall prevention mechanism 95 is demonstrated based on FIGS. The fall prevention mechanism 95 can be switched between a use state and a non-use state by an operation of a game hall (hall) employee or the like. 6 shows the fall prevention mechanism 95 in the non-use state, and FIG. 20 shows a bottom view when the fall prevention mechanism 95 in the non-use state shown in FIG. 6 is viewed from below.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the fall prevention mechanism 95 (grounding means) is provided on the bottom wall portion 231 of the operation mechanism portion 230 and can be grounded by extending downward. Specifically, a hollow portion 231a that is slightly recessed upward is formed at the center portion in the left-right direction of the bottom wall portion 231, and a fall prevention mechanism 95 is incorporated in the hollow portion 231a. The fall prevention mechanism 95 includes a first plate 96 shown in FIG. 20, a second plate 97 shown in FIG. 22B, a first shaft pin 98 shown in FIG. 20, and a second shaft shown in FIG. The pin 99 is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the first plate 96 (first grounding member) has a substantially rectangular flat plate shape, and the fall prevention mechanism 95 is in a non-use state (hereinafter simply referred to as “non-use state”). ) In the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. The first plate 96 forms the same plane as the bottom wall portion 231 of the operation mechanism portion 230 when not in use. The first plate 96 has a substantially U-shaped U-shaped attachment portion 96a on the right end side. The U-shaped attachment portion 96a is rotatably attached to a first shaft pin 98 that extends in the front-rear direction. The first shaft pin 98 is fixed to the bottom wall portion 231. Thus, the first plate 96 can rotate around the first shaft pin 98 extending in the front-rear direction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the first plate 96 has an L-shaped piece 96b (see FIG. 22A) formed in a substantially L shape on the rear end side. The L-shaped piece 96b can be engaged with a lock member 87 described later at the upper end (portion shown on the lower side in FIG. 21). Therefore, when the L-shaped piece 96b and the lock member 87 are locked, the rotation of the first plate 96 around the first shaft pin 98 is restricted. The L-shaped piece 96b is engaged with the lock member 87 in a state where the L-shaped piece 96b is inserted into the insertion hole 231c (see FIG. 22A) provided in the recess 231a of the bottom wall portion 231. Further, as shown in FIG. 20, a circular discharge hole 96c is formed in the first plate 96. The discharge hole 96c is for discharging the game ball stored in the lower tray 62 to the outside.

  Here, based on FIG.20 and FIG.21, the locking member 87 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 21, the lock member 87 is arranged above the fall prevention mechanism 95 in the operation mechanism unit 230 and is slidable in the left-right direction. The lock member 87 is formed with a round shaft portion 87a that protrudes downward. The round shaft portion 87a can be operated by a game hall employee or the like, and is inserted so as to be exposed from a long hole 231b formed in the bottom wall portion 231 of the operation mechanism portion 230 as shown in FIG. (See FIG. 22A). The long hole 231b is formed long in the left-right direction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the right end portion of the lock spring 59 is attached to the upper end of the lock member 87. The locking spring 59 extends in the left-right direction, and is attached to the operation mechanism unit 230 at the left end. As a result, the above-described round shaft portion 87a moves to the right against the urging force of the locking spring 59 from the state in which it contacts the left end of the long hole 231b (see FIG. 20) to the right end of the long hole 231b. It is possible to move in the direction. When the round shaft portion 87a is moved rightward in this way, the engagement between the L-shaped piece 96b of the first plate 96 and the lock member 87 is released. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22A from the state shown in FIG. 20, the first plate 96 and the second plate 97 can be rotated around the first shaft pin 98 so as to extend downward.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22A, the second plate 97 (second grounding member) is a substantially rectangular flat plate, and when not in use, the second plate 97 is just above the first plate 96. Extending in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction (see FIG. 21). The second plate 97 is attached to the first plate 96 via the second shaft pin 99 as shown in FIG. The second shaft pin 99 is integrally attached at the front end portion of the first plate 96. Thus, the second plate 97 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 22A around the second shaft pin 99 (rotating shaft) (see FIG. 22B) as shown in FIG. 22B. ).

  As shown in FIG. 22B, a winding spring 72 (biasing member) is assembled around the second shaft pin 99 (see FIG. 24). One end of the winding spring 72 is engaged with the first plate 96, and the other end of the winding spring 72 is engaged with the second plate 97. As a result, the second plate 97 is biased by the winding spring 72 so as to rotate forward (in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 24) around the second shaft pin 99. FIG. 23 shows a perspective view of the second plate 97 extending in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as viewed from the front.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, the second plate 97 has a discharge hole 97a. The discharge hole 97a is for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 62 to the outside. In this embodiment, when not in use, the discharge hole 231d provided in the recess 231a of the bottom wall 231, the discharge hole 97a of the second plate 97, and the discharge hole 96c of the first plate 96 communicate with each other. To do. As a result, the game balls stored in the lower tray 62 can be discharged to the outside through the discharge holes 231d, 97a, and 96c.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the second plate 97 has a first engagement portion 97b (rear engagement portion) and a second engagement portion 97c at the upper edge portion 97U when extending in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. (Front engaging portion). The first engaging portion 97b and the second engaging portion 97c are provided to be spaced apart in the left-right direction and protrude upward from the upper edge portion 97U. The first engaging portion 97b is disposed closer to the second shaft pin 99 than the second engaging portion 97c.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, a plate-like fixture 232 (engagement member) extending downward is attached to the lower end on the front side of the operation mechanism section 230. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 24, the first engaging portion 97 b can be engaged with the rear surface 232 a of the fixing tool 232. Further, the second engagement portion 97 c can be engaged with the front surface 232 b of the fixture 232. That is, while the first plate 96 and the second plate 97 are rotated around the first shaft pin 98 in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 22A from the non-use state, the second plate 97 is moved around the second shaft pin 99. 24, the first engagement portion 97b is engaged with the rear surface 232a of the fixture 232, and the second engagement portion 97c is engaged with the front surface 232b of the fixture 232. Is possible. Thereby, the fall prevention mechanism 95 will be in a use condition.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, when the second plate 97 extends in the up-down direction and the left-right direction, the protrusion amount SB protruding upward from the upper edge portion 97U in the second engagement portion 97c is The first engaging portion 97b is smaller than the protruding amount SA protruding upward from the upper edge portion 97U. Accordingly, when the second plate 97 is rotated in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 24, the second engagement portion 97c is disposed on the front side of the fixture 232 because the protrusion amount SB is smaller than the protrusion amount SA. It can be made easier. On the other hand, since the second plate 97 receives a biasing force in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 24 by the winding spring 72, the projection amount SA is larger than the projection amount SB. It is possible to facilitate engagement with the rear surface 232a of 232.

  FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the fall prevention mechanism 95 is in use. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from diagonally below right when the fall prevention mechanism 95 is in use. When the fall prevention mechanism 95 is used, the fall prevention mechanism 95 is first changed from the non-use state to the use state while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is slightly inclined backward (see FIGS. 25 and 26). At this time, as described above, the second plate 97 receives a biasing force in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 24 by the winding spring 72, and the first engaging portion 97b engages with the rear surface 232a of the fixture 232. The use state of the prevention mechanism 95 can be maintained. Thereafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is brought into an upright state. As a result, the first plate 96 is grounded and the second plate 97 is grounded. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from falling forward.

  At this time, since the first plate 96 is long in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, it can be grounded long in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, since the second plate 97 is long in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, it can be grounded long in the horizontal direction. Thus, since sufficient grounding is possible in both the front-rear direction and the left-right direction, it is possible to further stabilize the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is self-supporting.

  Further, as described above, since a large heavy object (upper decorative portion 200) is mounted on the upper front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a preload acts strongly. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is about to fall forward, a large ground reaction force acts backward on the grounded second plate 97. At this time, as shown in FIG. 24, the second engaging portion 97 c of the second plate 97 is arranged in front of the fixture 232 and is firmly hooked (engaged) with the front surface 232 b of the fixture 232. Thereby, the rotation of the second plate 97 around the second shaft pin 99 is restricted, and the second plate 97 that is grounded in the left-right direction becomes like a fixed object. As a result, the ground reaction force by the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately received by the second plate 97.

  In addition, this pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be independent without the fall prevention mechanism 95. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily maintained by making the pachinko gaming machine 1 independent by the fall prevention mechanism 95. That is, maintenance work can be performed without preparing a person who supports the pachinko gaming machine 1 separately.

  Next, a method for changing the fall prevention mechanism 95 from the use state to the non-use state will be described. In this case, first, from the state shown in FIG. 24, the first plate 96 and the second plate 97 are slightly rotated around the first shaft pin 98 in the clockwise direction, so that the second engagement portion 97c and the fixture 232 are moved. The engagement with the front surface 232b is released, and the engagement between the first engagement portion 97b and the rear surface 232a of the fixture 232 is released.

  Subsequently, the second plate 97 is rotated around the second shaft pin 99 in the direction opposite to the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 24 against the urging force of the winding spring 72 to obtain the state shown in FIG. To. Thereafter, the first plate 96 and the second plate 97 are rotated around the first shaft pin 98 in the direction opposite to the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. Then, the L-shaped piece 96 b of the first plate 96 is inserted into the insertion hole 231 c and is engaged with the lock member 87. As a result, as shown in FIG. 20, the fall prevention mechanism 95 is not used.

  Thus, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the fall prevention mechanism 95 is not used, so that it can be left in an unused state. At this time, the first plate 96 and the second plate 97 extend in the horizontal direction (the front-rear direction and the left-right direction) at the recessed portion 231 a of the bottom wall portion 231 of the operation mechanism portion 230. Therefore, the first plate 96 and the second plate 97 are not visible from the front (see FIG. 3). Therefore, by leaving the fall prevention mechanism 95 in a non-use state, it is possible to prevent the beauty of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being impaired.

  Next, the game board 2 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 2 is a plate-like member, and a rear unit (various control boards, a first image display device 6, a second image display device 7, a movable board 15, a harness, and the like mounted on the rear side thereof. ) And the game board unit 2U. The game board unit 2U is provided with a number of board lamps 5 (see FIG. 65) that can emit light in various emission colors. In addition, the game board 2 is configured with a material that can transmit visible light as a main constituent material. As a constituent material of such a game board 2, for example, a light transmissive resin such as acrylic may be used.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, on the front side of the game board 2, a game board surface 2a standing in the vertical direction is formed. In front of the game board surface 2 a, a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down is surrounded by the rail member 4.

  On the game board surface 2a of the game board 2, a plurality of game nails (not shown) for guiding a game ball are projected. Further, a first image display device (first display means, first display device) 6 which is a liquid crystal display device is arranged behind the game board 2. The first image display device 6 is fixed in a standing state in the vertical direction.

  On the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6, the decorative display (effect design) 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed in synchronization with the variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. There is a decorative symbol display area. The decorative symbol display area includes, for example, three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. A left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, a middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area, and a right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. Each of the decorative symbols is composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. The first image display device 6 has a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, by a combination of left, middle and right decorative symbols. The result of the variable display of the symbol and the second special symbol (that is, the result of the big hit lottery) is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

  For example, when winning a jackpot, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a doublet such as “777”. Further, if it is out of place, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a disparity such as “263”. This makes it easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, the player generally grasps the result of the jackpot lottery with the first image display device 6 rather than with the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. In addition, as an aspect of the decorative symbol variation display, for example, there is an aspect of scrolling up and down. In addition, it is possible to arbitrarily change which combination of decorative symbols to stop and display according to each lottery result.

  The first image display device 6 is a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game, in addition to the decorative symbol variation effect using the decorative symbol as described above (also referred to as “effect symbol variation effect” or simply “variation effect”). Or a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer is displayed on the display screen 6a. In the decorative symbol variation effect, in addition to decorative symbols such as numbers, effect images other than decorative symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed.

  The display screen 6a of the first image display device 6 includes a first effect hold display area 9a for displaying an effect hold image 9A according to the number of stored first special figure hold described later, and a second special figure hold described later. There is a second effect hold display area 9b for displaying the effect hold image 9B according to the number of stored images. The number of stored first special figure hold and the second special figure hold indicator 43b (FIG. 30) displayed on a first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 30) described later by displaying the effect hold images 9A and 9B. It is possible to easily show the number of stored second special figure holds displayed in (see) to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a second image display device (second display means, second display device) 7 above the first image display device 6. . On the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7, a background image and a character image are combined with the decorative symbol variation effect, the jackpot effect, the demonstration effect for the customer waiting, etc. executed on the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6. Various effect images are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the second image display device 7 is fixed in a state of being inclined obliquely upward toward the front. The upper portion 7 b of the display screen 7 a of the second image display device 7 protrudes forward from the game board surface 2 a of the game board 2. Thereby, it is possible to show the player the upper part 7b of the display screen 7a at a closer position. Furthermore, the upper part 7b of the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7 protrudes above the upper end of the game area 3 as shown in FIG. Thereby, it is possible to show the player the upper part 7b of the display screen 7a even outside the game area 3. In this way, in this embodiment, a novel display screen is formed by the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6 and the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7, and the effect image is displayed over a wide range and close to the player. It is possible to show. As a result, it is possible to increase the impact of the effect image displayed on the display screens 6a and 7a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the game board unit 2U has a board movable body 15 in the space behind the game board 2 and in front of the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6. The board movable body 15 takes an advanced state in which the first image display device 6 and the second image display device 7 have advanced to the front when the presentation using these is performed. A retreat state is taken in which the image display device 6 or the second image display device 7 is retracted from the front in the left-right direction or the up-down direction.

  Moreover, the board movable body 15 of this form is comprised by 15 A of 1st board movable bodies located in the front, the 3rd board movable body 15C located in back, and the 2nd board movable body 15B located among these. Has been. That is, in the game board unit 2U, a board movable body 15 having three layers in the front-rear direction is provided in the space from the game board 2 to the first image display device 6. The first panel movable body 15A, the second panel movable body 15B, and the third panel movable body 15C are driven by a panel movable body drive motor 15a described later. A plurality of movable board movable body drive motors 15a may be used, and the first movable board movable body 15A, the second movable board movable body 15B, and the third movable board movable body 15C may be driven at independent timings. .

  Further, the game board unit 2U has four layers of decorative members on the rear side of the game board 2 in the front-rear direction when the first image display device 6 is combined with the board movable body 15 having a three-layer structure. In this embodiment, as many as four layers of decorative members are arranged in a state where they can overlap each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the board movable body 15, which is the decoration part of the game board unit 2U, the first image display device 6, and the second image display device 7, are used to produce a variety of effects as compared with the conventional art. It is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the center decoration body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the first image display device 6. A stage portion 11 capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface to a first starting port 20 described later is formed at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left side of the center decorative body 10 to allow a game ball to flow in from the entrance and to flow out from the exit to the stage portion 11. A movable panel body (decorative movable body) 15 that can be displaced in front of the display screen 6 a of the first image display device 6 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10. The panel movable body 15 is movable from an origin position that is hardly visible from the front to a drive position that appears in front of the center of the display screen 6 a of the first image display device 6.

  Below the first image display device 6 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 including a first starting port (first starting winning port, first winning port, fixed starting port) 20 is provided. The first start opening 20 is a winning opening where the ease of entering a game ball does not always change. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery of the first special symbol (a jackpot lottery, that is, determination of acquisition of a jackpot random number or the like).

  Also, below the first start port 20, an ordinary variable winning device (so-called electric chew) 22 having a second start port (second start winning port, second ball opening port, variable start port) 21 is provided. . The second start opening 21 is a winning opening in which the ease of entering a game ball can be changed. In addition, the 2nd starting port 21 of this form is an opening part formed with the plane extended in the up-down direction and the front-back direction. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the lottery of the second special symbol.

  The electric chew 22 includes a movable member (entrance opening / closing member) 23 that can advance and retract in the front-rear direction, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (see FIG. 63). The second starting port 21 allows a game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 advances forward (that is, when the movable member 23 is in the open state). That is, when the movable member 23 advances forward, when the game ball flowing down contacts the upper side of the movable member 23, the movable member 23 is guided to the left. As a result, the game ball can enter the second start port 21.

  On the other hand, when the second start port 21 is retracted rearward (that is, when it is in the closed state), the game ball cannot enter. That is, when the movable member 23 is retracted rearward, the flowing game ball does not contact the movable member 23. Thereby, the game ball goes to the out port 16 described later without entering the second start port 21. Note that the second start port 21 is completely open when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as it is more difficult for the game ball to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than in the open state. It may not be impossible to enter the ball.

  A first big prize device (first special variable prize device) 31 including a first big prize port (first special prize port) 30 is provided diagonally to the right of the first start port 20. The first big prize winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member (first special prize opening opening / closing member) 32 that takes an open state and a closed state, and opens and closes the first big prize winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 63). The first grand prize opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is open (that is, when it is open).

  Further, a gate (passage area) 28 through which a game ball can pass is provided above the first grand prize opening 30. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers the execution of a normal symbol lottery (that is, acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number (per random number)) for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.

  Further, a second large winning device (second special variable winning device) 36 having a second large winning port (second special winning port) 35 is provided obliquely above and to the right of the gate 28. The second big prize winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member (second special prize opening opening / closing member) 37 that takes an open state and a closed state, and opens / closes the second big prize winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 63). The second big winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is open (that is, when it is open).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (A), inside the second grand prize-winning device 36, a specific area (V area) 39 through which the game ball that has passed through the second major prize winning opening 35 can pass and non- A specific region 70 is formed. In the second grand prize-winning device 36, a second grand prize port sensor 35a for detecting the winning of a game ball to the second big prize port 35 is disposed upstream of the specific area 39 and the non-specific area 70. . The specific area 39 is provided with a specific area sensor 39 a that detects the passage of a game ball to the specific area 39. Further, the non-specific area 70 is provided with a non-specific area sensor 70 a that detects the passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 70. In addition, the second grand prize winning device 36 distributes the game balls that have passed through the second grand prize winning opening 35 to either the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 70, and the distribution that drives the distribution member 71. And a member solenoid 73. The sorting member 71 moves back and forth in the left-right direction, and takes a retracted state retracted to the right (first state) or an advanced state advanced to the left (second state).

  FIG. 29A shows when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized. As shown in FIG. 29A, when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized, the distribution member 71 is in a first state that allows the game ball to pass to the specific area 39. When the distribution member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second big prize opening 35 passes through the specific area 39 after passing through the second big prize opening sensor 35a. This game ball route is referred to as a first route.

  FIG. 29B shows a state in which the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized. As shown in FIG. 29B, when the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized, the distribution member 71 is in a second state that prevents the game ball from passing to the specific area 39. When the distribution member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second big prize opening 35 rolls on the upper surface of the distribution member 71 after passing through the second big prize opening sensor 35a, so that Pass through the specific area 70. This game ball route is referred to as a second route.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passing of the game ball to the specific area 39 is an opportunity to shift to a high probability state described later. That is, the specific area 39 is a probability changing operation port. On the other hand, the non-specific region 70 is not a probability variation operating port. Further, the first large winning device 31 is not provided with a specific area as a probability changing operation port. That is, only non-specific areas are provided.

  Returning to FIG. 27, a normal winning opening 27 is provided at the lower left and lower right of the game area 3. Further, at the bottom of the game area 3, there is provided an out port 16 through which game balls that have been thrown into the game area 3 but have not won any winning holes are discharged out of the game area 3.

  In this way, the game area 3 in which various winning holes are arranged, the left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and the right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. There is. The method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called left-handed. On the other hand, a method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is referred to as a right hit. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when playing left-handed is referred to as a first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing right-handed. Is referred to as a second flow path R2.

  On the first flow path R <b> 1, a normal winning port 27, a first start port 20, a second start port 21, and an out port 16 are provided. The player aims to win the first starting port 20 by making a left strike. The game ball that has flowed down the first flow path R1 is configured to hardly win the second starting port 21.

  On the other hand, on the second flow path R <b> 2, a second grand prize winning device 36, a first grand prize winning device 31, a normal prize winning port 27, a second starting port 21, and an out port 16 are provided. The player aims to win the second big prize opening 35 (pass to the specific area 39), pass to the gate 28, or win the first big prize opening 30 by making a right turn.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, a display device 40 is arranged at the lower left portion of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. 30, the display device 40 variably displays a first special symbol display 41a for variably displaying a first special symbol (first identification symbol) and a second special symbol (second identification symbol). A second special symbol display 41b and a normal symbol display 42 that variably displays a normal symbol are included. In addition, the display units 40 hold the operation of the first special symbol display unit 43a and the second special symbol display unit 41b for displaying the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display unit 41a. A second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored (second special figure hold) and a general figure hold display 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (common figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 is included. It is.

  The variable display of the first special symbol is performed in response to the winning of a game ball at the first start port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed in response to a winning of a game ball at the second start port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol (identification symbol). The first special figure hold and the second special figure hold may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display 41. Further, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold indicator 43.

  In the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variably displayed, and then the stop symbol is displayed to notify the result of the lottery (special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) based on winning at the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. . The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the special symbol that is derived and displayed as the display result of the stop symbol and variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (a special symbol of a specific stop mode, that is, a jackpot symbol), the first big prize opening 30 or the opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed A special game (a jackpot game) is performed in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of several types of jackpots to be described later), 1, 2, from the left such as “○ ●●● ○○ ●●” (○: lit, ●: unlit) The jackpot symbol in which the fifth and sixth LEDs are lit is displayed. In the case of a loss, a lost symbol in which only the rightmost LED is lit, such as “●●●●●●● ○”, is displayed. You may employ | adopt the aspect which light-extinguishes all LED as a loss pattern. In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol variation display (variable display) is performed over a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, such that light repeatedly flows from left to right. In this mode, the LED is turned on. The mode of the variable display may be anything such as all the LEDs blinking at once as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode).

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when there is a winning game ball (win ball) at the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various random number values such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the winning game (winning information) Is temporarily stored in the special figure storage unit 85 (see FIG. 63). Specifically, if the winning is for the first starting port 20, the first special figure holding is stored in the first special drawing storage unit 85 a (see FIG. 63), and if the winning is for the second starting port 21, It is memorize | stored in the 2nd special figure reservation memory | storage part 85b (refer FIG. 63) as 2 special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four.

  The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when a special symbol based on the special figure hold can be variably displayed. Digesting a special figure hold means that a jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure hold is determined, and a special symbol variable display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable symbol variable display Even if there is a prize during the execution of a special game or during a special game, the right of lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

  The number of special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold display 43. Specifically, the special figure hold indicator 43 is composed of, for example, four LEDs (see FIG. 30), and displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs by the number of special figure hold.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as an opportunity. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by variably displaying the normal symbol and then displaying the stop symbol. A normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (a normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a variable display result) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by a normal symbol lottery. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific symbol (a normal symbol of a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning symbol), the second start port 21 is opened with an opening pattern corresponding to the current gaming state. An auxiliary game to be performed is performed. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  The normal symbol display 42 is composed of, for example, two LEDs (see FIG. 30), and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as “◯◯” (◯: lit, ●: unlit). Further, when the lottery result is a loss, a normal lose symbol in which only the right LED is lit is displayed as “● ○”. You may employ | adopt the aspect which light-extinguishes all LED as a normal lose pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol variation display (variable display) is performed for a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. The mode of the variable display may be anything such as all the LEDs blinking at once as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes to the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (per random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the general figure storage unit 86 (see FIG. 63). Temporarily stored as figure hold. There is an upper limit to the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the saved map storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four.

  The general map reservation stored in the general map storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined and variable symbol display for displaying the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game Even if there is a case, the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

  The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. Specifically, the general map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs (see FIG. 30), and displays the number of general map holds by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of general map holds. is there.

  FIG. 31 shows a cross-sectional view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the center position in the left-right direction. FIG. 31 shows a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board unit 2U. FIG. 31 shows a state where all the gaming machine frames 50 are closed. That is, the inner frame 52 and the front frame 53 are in a closed state, and the game board surface 2a of the game board 2 is separated from the space outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the closed state of the front frame 53, a game space 3 </ b> S is formed between the rear surface 55 c of the glass plate 55 attached to the front frame 53 and the game board surface 2 a of the game board 2. The game space 3S is a space corresponding to the game area 3, and is a space in which game balls can flow down.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 31, the front surface 55b of the glass plate 55 is positioned in front of the front surface of the curtain plate 51a in the front-rear direction. Conventionally, the front surface 55b of the glass plate 55 is located behind the curtain plate 51a, and the game space 3S is far from the player. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the glass plate 55 is provided at a more forward position so that the front surface 55b is more forward than the front surface of the curtain plate 51a. A game space 3S is arranged at a position close to the player. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the flow of the game ball at a position closer than before. Thereby, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the movement of the game ball flowing down the game space 3S feel more dynamic than before. In this embodiment, the glass plate 55 is moved forward by 13 mm compared to the conventional case. As a result, the game space 3S is moved forward by 13 mm compared to the prior art.

  FIG. 31 shows a distance L7 from the front surface position P2 of the curtain plate 51a to the front surface 55b of the glass plate 55. The distance L7 is preferably 5 mm or more. That is, when the front surface 55b of the glass plate 55 is located 5 mm or more in front of the front surface position P2 of the curtain plate 51a, the player feels the movement of the flowing game ball sufficiently dynamically. Because it is possible. In this embodiment, the distance L7 is about 10 mm which is 5 mm or more. Therefore, the player feels the movement of the game ball flowing down sufficiently dynamically, thereby improving the interest.

  Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game board 2 is arranged ahead of the conventional one because the game space 3S is located in the front. However, the game board surface 2a of the game board 2 is located behind the front surface of the curtain plate 51a in the front-rear direction. The more the game space 3S is located forward, the more the player can feel the movement of the game ball dynamically, while the closer the game board surface 2a of the game board 2 is to the player, the easier it is for the player to feel a sense of pressure. It tends to end up. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game board surface 2a of the game board 2 is positioned behind the curtain plate 51a so as not to be too close to the player. As a result, the feeling of pressure felt by the player is reduced. FIG. 31 shows a distance L8 from the front surface position P2 of the curtain board 51a to the game board surface 2a of the game board 2. In this embodiment, the distance L8 is about 28 mm. Therefore, the feeling of pressure felt by the player can be sufficiently reduced.

  Further, as described above, the game board 2 is configured with a material that can transmit visible light as a main constituent material. Therefore, the player does not feel so much pressure even though the game board 2 is located closer than before.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game board 2 is arranged in front of the conventional one. Thereby, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a space larger than the conventional space is secured behind the game board 2. In this embodiment, a sufficient space larger than the conventional space is secured behind the game board 2 so that four layers of decorative members (first board movable) that can overlap with each other in the front-rear direction. The body 15A, the second board movable body 15B, the third board movable body 15C, and the first image display device 6) can be provided.

  Moreover, in this form, since the glass plate 55 and the game board 2 are located ahead of the prior art, from the front surface 55b and the game board surface 2a of the glass plate 55 to the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6. The distance is longer than before. In such a case, the player tends to feel the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6 in the distance. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player cannot show a powerful effect image only with the display screen 6 a of the first image display device 6.

  However, in this embodiment, the second image display device 7 is provided above the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6 and is inclined obliquely upward toward the front. Thereby, the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6 and the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7 are provided along the intersecting surfaces, not in parallel with each other. Then, by using the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6 and the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7 provided along the planes intersecting each other, the player can produce an effect. It is possible to make the image feel the depth. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a deep and powerful effect image.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be used in combination with the ball processing unit 1000 shown in FIG. The ball processing unit 1000 can perform processing such as supply of game balls to the pachinko gaming machine 1, collection of game balls discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and counting of the collected game balls.

  In FIG. 32, the ball processing unit 1000 is arranged facing the left edge 50 </ b> L of the gaming machine frame 50 on the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The ball processing unit 1000 includes a bill insertion port 1003, an operation unit 1004, and a card insertion / discharge port 1005 in the main body portion. The ball processing unit 1000 includes a supply nozzle 1001 and a collection counter 1002 that extend from the main body portion to the right side.

  The bill insertion slot 1003 is a place where a player inserts a bill for receiving a rental of a game ball. Note that not only banknotes but also coins may be inserted, and both banknotes and coins may be inserted. The card insertion / discharge port 1005 is capable of inserting and discharging a card in which predetermined information is recorded. The information recorded on the card includes, for example, the number of game balls that the player has lent out, and the balance that has not yet been used for renting game balls out of the amount inserted into the bill insertion slot 1003. Corresponding information. The operation unit 1004 includes, for example, buttons and a touch panel that can be operated by the player. The player can perform a game ball payout operation, a card PIN code input, and the like by operating the operation unit 1004.

  The supply nozzle 1001 extends from the main body portion of the ball processing unit 1000 to above the hitting ball supply tray 61 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The supply nozzle 1001 can supply a predetermined number of game balls to the hit ball supply tray 61 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when, for example, a player performs a game ball payout operation.

  The collection counting unit 1002 extends from the main body portion of the ball processing unit 1000 to a position below the surplus ball tray 62 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the collection counting unit 1002 has an opening corresponding to the discharge port 62a provided in the lower portion of the surplus ball receiving tray 62, and collects the game balls discharged from the surplus ball receiving tray 62 through the discharge port 62a, The number of collected game balls can be counted. Note that the game balls collected by the collection counting unit 1002 are moved to the main body portion of the ball processing unit 1000, and thereafter can be supplied from the supply nozzle 1001 to the hitting ball supply tray 61 of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment can use the ball processing unit 1000 without any problem even though the game space 3S is positioned forward of the game space 3S. That is, when the game space 3S is positioned forward than the conventional one, the entire front portion of the gaming machine frame 50 extends forward by the distance that the game space 3S is moved forward than the conventional one. It is normal to be configured. However, in this embodiment, although the game space 3S is positioned forward than the conventional one, the curtain plate 51a is moved to the conventional position or the game space 3S forward than the conventional one. It has moved only a distance less than the distance.

  By being configured in this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a space in which the collection counting unit 1002 of the ball processing unit 1000 can be installed is sufficiently secured in front of the curtain plate 51a. Therefore, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 31, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the collection counting unit 1002 of the ball processing unit 1000 can be appropriately installed without interfering with the curtain plate 51a. Further, even when there is no collection counting unit 1002, even when the game ball discharged from the discharge port 62a of the surplus ball receiving tray 62 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is received by the ball box, Can be placed. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the discharge port 62a of the surplus ball receiving tray 62 is prevented from spilling.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the left side decoration part 210 of the front frame 53 on the side where the ball processing unit 1000 is arranged has the left side first decoration part 211, the left side second decoration part 212, the left side decoration part 212 as described above. 3 decoration parts 213 are comprised. The left first decorative portion 211 is positioned above the left decorative portion 210, and the left second decorative portion 212 is positioned below the left decorative portion 210. In addition, the left third decorative portion 213 is located between the left first decorative portion 211 and the left third decorative portion 213 in the left decorative portion 210. That is, the left decorative portion 210 is configured by providing the left first decorative portion 211, the left third decorative portion 213, and the left second decorative portion 212 in this order from the top to the bottom. As a result, the left third decorative portion 213 is arranged at a height corresponding to the supply nozzle 1001 of the ball processing unit 1000, as shown in FIG.

  And as shown in FIG. 31, the left side 3rd decoration part 213 is dented in the back side rather than the left side 1st decoration part 211. As shown in FIG. Further, the left third decorative portion 213 is recessed rearward from the left second decorative portion 212. That is, the left decorative portion 210 has a concave surface 213a that is recessed at the position of the left third decorative portion 213 on the front surface thereof. The amount of depression of the concave surface 213a is the amount by which the game space 3S is moved forward as compared with the conventional case. That is, the left decorative portion 210 has a recess of about 13 mm at the position of the left third decorative portion 213. In this embodiment, the distance L9 from the front surface position P2 of the curtain plate 51a to the concave surface 213a of the left third decorative portion 213 is about 25 mm. On the other hand, the distance from the front surface position P2 of the curtain plate 51a to the front surface position of the left first decorative portion 211 is 38 mm or more. Further, the distance from the front surface position P2 of the curtain plate 51a to the front surface position of the left second decorative portion 212 is also 38 mm or more.

  By configuring the left decorative portion 210 in this manner, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a space in which the supply nozzle 1001 of the ball processing unit 1000 can be disposed in front of the left third decorative portion 213 in the left decorative portion 210. Is sufficiently secured. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 31, the supply nozzle 1001 of the ball processing unit 1000 can be appropriately arranged without interfering with the left decorative portion 210.

  In order to configure the left decorative portion 210 so that the supply nozzle 1001 can be appropriately disposed, the lower edge 50D of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 32 to the lower end of the left third decorative portion 213 is shown. The distance L10 is preferably 319 mm or less. Furthermore, the distance L11 from the lower edge 50D of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the upper end of the left third decorative portion 213 is preferably 379 mm or more.

  Further, the left decorative portion 210 of the present embodiment is provided with a decoration that can be viewed at least from the front. Specifically, the left first decorative portion 211 and the left second decorative portion 212 of the left decorative portion 210 are each colored in a region divided into three in the left-right direction. In this embodiment, the front surface (concave surface 213a) of the left third decorative portion 213 between the left first decorative portion 211 and the left second decorative portion 212 is also given the same three-divided color. Thereby, in the left decorative part 210, the left first decorative part 211, the left second decorative part 212, and the left third decorative part 213 are provided with uniform decoration. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is uniform as a whole in the left decoration unit 210 even when, for example, a ball processing unit not provided with a supply nozzle is provided or a ball processing unit 1000 is not provided. With a certain decoration, it has a high aesthetic appearance.

  Further, in the left decorative portion 210, the left first decorative portion 211 and the left second decorative portion 212 are thick in the front-rear direction and there is sufficient space behind the front surface. For this reason, the left first decorative portion 211 and the left second decorative portion 212 are provided with LEDs (frame lamps 66) behind (ie, inside) the front surfaces thereof. Therefore, it is possible to produce effects according to the progress of the game by the light emission mode of the LED.

  On the other hand, the left third decorative portion 213 is thin in the front-rear direction, and there is not enough space behind the concave surface 213a to allow LEDs to be provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, the left third decorative portion 213 does not correspond to the light emission effect. However, even such a thin left third decorative portion 213 can be adopted as long as it is an edge type arrangement in which LEDs are arranged on the side instead of behind the concave surface 213a. Then, by providing the LEDs in an edge-type arrangement, the left third decorative portion 213 can also produce an effect in accordance with the progress of the game due to the light emission mode of the LEDs. In addition, by making the left third decoration portion 213 perform the light emission effect of the LED in accordance with the progress of the game as described above, it is possible to configure the left decoration portion 210 that is more uniform as a whole.

2. Configuration of Movable Body Unit Next, the configuration of the movable body unit 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. The movable body unit 201 is a unit for enabling the movable frame body 400 described later to move. As shown in FIG. 33, the movable body unit 201 can be attached to and detached from a horizontal upper wall portion 57 provided at the upper end of the base frame 56 of the front frame 53 by using a screw (not shown). Therefore, the movable body unit 201 of the present embodiment can be independently replaced regardless of the attachment state of the light emitter units 202L and 202R, the left decorative portion 210, and the right decorative portion 220 to the base frame 56.

  FIG. 34A is a plan view of the movable body unit 201, and FIG. 34B is a front view of the movable body unit 201. As shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the movable body unit 201 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction. Specifically, the length L4 in the front-rear direction of the movable body unit 201 is about 406.2 mm. The length L5 in the left-right direction of the movable body unit 201 is about 294.3 mm. The length L6 in the vertical direction of the movable body unit 201 is about 199.9 mm. Moreover, the weight of the movable body unit 201 is about 6.5 kg. Thus, the movable body unit 201 of this embodiment is much larger and heavier than a conventional unit including a general movable body.

  The light emitting units 202L and 202R (see FIG. 3) have a weight of about 3 kg. Therefore, in the upper decoration part 200 of this embodiment, the total weight of the movable body unit 201 and the light emitter units 202L and 202R has a weight of about 9.5 kg. Therefore, in the gaming machine frame 50 of the present embodiment, the weight is increased by about 9.5 kg as compared to a gaming machine frame in which no movable object (heavy object) is mounted on the upper decorative portion. And the gaming machine frame 50 of this embodiment has a weight that is biased to the upper front side by the movable unit 201 that protrudes greatly forward and is heavy.

  FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left speaker 67L and the right speaker 67R when the movable body unit 201 is viewed from below. As shown in FIG. 35, the left speaker 67L and the right speaker 67R are arranged at the lower end on the rear side of the movable body unit 201. In the following, since the left speaker 67L and the right speaker 67R have a bilaterally symmetric configuration, the configuration of the left speaker 67L will be described below as a representative.

  The left speaker 67L outputs sound by converting a control signal (electrical signal) transmitted from a sound control board 106, which will be described later, into a sound wave. The left speaker 67L includes a speaker body 67a, an assembly cover 67b, a speaker grill 67c, and a decorative cover 67d. The speaker body 67a includes a frustoconical diaphragm 67a1, and can output sound by vibrating the diaphragm 67a1. The assembly cover 67b is for assembling the speaker body 67a to the left rear end portion of the horizontal portion 303 of the connecting plate 301 described later. The speaker grille 67c protects the diaphragm 67a1 of the speaker body 67a. The decorative cover 67d is decorated and is assembled to the left rear end portion of the horizontal portion 303 of the connecting plate 301 in a state of covering the speaker body 67a, the assembly cover 67b, and the speaker grille 67c. is there.

  Here, in the left speaker 67L, the axial center ZL of the diaphragm 67a1 of the speaker body 67a extends obliquely downward toward the left (see FIG. 6). That is, the axis center ZL is directed to the vicinity of the left ear of the player sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player's left ear to hear the sound (production sound, etc.) output from the left speaker 67L. On the other hand, in the right speaker 67R, the axial center ZR of the diaphragm 67a1 of the speaker body 67a extends obliquely downward toward the right (see FIG. 6). That is, the axis center ZR is directed to the vicinity of the right ear of the player sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player's right ear to hear the sound (production sound, etc.) output from the right speaker 67R. Hereinafter, the left speaker 67L and the right speaker 67R are collectively referred to as “speaker 67”.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body unit 201. As shown in FIG. 36, the movable body unit 201 can be divided into three parts, and is assembled to the upper lid member 240, the unit main body 250 disposed below the upper lid member 240, and the front side of the unit main body 250. A front cover 260.

  Based on FIG. 36, the structure of the upper side cover member 240 is demonstrated. The upper lid member 240 forms the upper wall portion of the movable body unit 201 (upper decorative portion 200). The upper lid member 240 is slightly inclined obliquely downward toward the front, includes a substantially triangular front plate 241 (bent portion) on the front side, and a substantially rectangular rear plate 242 (fixed on the rear side). Part).

  The front plate 241 is for hiding the upper surface on the front side of the movable frame body 400 described later. The left end on the rear side of the front plate 241 is rotatably attached to the left end on the front side of the rear plate 242 via a left mounting pin 243L (see FIG. 34A) extending in the left-right direction. ing. Further, the right end portion on the rear side of the front plate 241 is rotatably attached to the right end portion on the front side of the rear plate 242 via a right mounting pin 243R (see FIG. 34B) extending in the left-right direction. ing.

  However, locking portions (not shown) are provided at both front ends of the rear plate 242 so that the front plate 241 does not rotate in the direction indicated by the arrow X2 in FIG. Accordingly, the front plate 241 can rotate only in the direction indicated by the arrow X1 in FIG. 36 with respect to the rear plate 242. As shown in FIG. 34A, a winding spring 244 (biasing member) is assembled to the right mounting pin 243R. One end of the winding spring 244 is engaged with the front plate 241, and the other end of the winding spring 244 is engaged with the rear plate 242. Due to the urging force of the winding spring 244, the front plate 241 does not rotate with respect to the rear plate 242 and forms the same plane.

  The rear plate 242 is for hiding the upper surface on the rear side of the frame movable body 400 described later. The rear plate 242 is fixed to the mounting portion 361 of the rotating member 360 of the rotating mechanism unit 300 described later on both the left and right sides via screws. Therefore, when an external force (such as a force that causes the front plate 241 to bend upward by hand) acts on the front plate 241 in the direction indicated by the arrow X1 in FIG. 36, the front plate 241 is against the fixed rear plate 242. It can rotate in the direction indicated by the arrow X1 in FIG. That is, the front plate 241 can rotate (bend) against the urging force of the winding spring 244. The effect that the front plate 241 can be bent with respect to the rear plate 242 will be described later.

  FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the unit main body 250. As shown in FIG. 37, the unit main body 250 can be divided into three parts, and includes a rotation mechanism unit 300, a movable frame body 400 assembled inside the rotation mechanism unit 300, and a lower assembly of the movable frame body 400. And a lower cover 800 to be attached.

  Next, the configuration of the front cover 260 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front cover 260 forms a front wall portion of the movable body unit 201 (upper decorative portion 200). As shown in FIG. 38A, the front cover 260 stands up in the vertical direction and is long in the horizontal direction so as to hide the front side of the frame movable body 400 described later (see FIG. 36). Is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 38B, the front cover 260 is composed of two covers, an outer cover 261 disposed on the outer side (front side) and an inner cover 262 disposed on the inner side (rear side). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, a touch electrode 263 is attached to the upper end of the front cover 260 (outer cover 261) along the left-right direction (see FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 38B, a touch sensor 264 is attached to the upper end portion on the rear surface side of the outer cover 261. The touch sensor 264 detects contact of the human body with the touch electrode 263, and is specifically a capacitive touch sensor that uses a high-frequency oscillation circuit. That is, when the human body comes into contact with the touch electrode 263, the high-frequency sine wave voltage oscillated by the high-frequency oscillation circuit decreases based on the electrostatic capacitance (human body capacitance) with respect to the ground of the human body. The touch sensor 264 detects that the human body has touched the touch electrode 263 by detecting the decrease in the high-frequency sine wave voltage.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, a cushioning member 265 made of rubber is attached to the lower end of the front cover 260 (outer cover 261) (see FIG. 6). The buffer member 265 extends in the left-right direction at the lower end of the outer cover 261, and both left and right end portions are curved backward. Here, as described above, the upper decorative portion 200 (movable body unit 201) protrudes more than twice from the operation mechanism portion 230 with respect to the outer frame 51 (see FIG. 4). Therefore, if the player suddenly stands up after concentrating on the operation of the handle 60, the effect button 63, the select button 68, etc. of the operation mechanism unit 230, the player may collide with the lower end of the front cover 260. Therefore, even if the player's head or the like collides with the lower end of the front cover 260, the shock can be reduced by the buffer member 265. Furthermore, the lower end on the front side of the movable body unit 201 that protrudes forward is a portion that easily collides when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transported or the like, so that it is difficult for the buffer member 265 to cause breakage or damage. .

  A left lower end 266 (see FIG. 38B) of the front cover 260 is attached to a frame movable body 400 (in detail, an upright part 342 of the attachment member 340 of the left link unit 302L). Further, the lower right end (not shown) of the right side of the front cover 260 is also attached to the frame movable body 400 (specifically, the upright portion 342 of the attachment member 340 of the right link unit 302R). Therefore, the front cover 260 moves with the movable frame body 400.

  Next, the configuration of the rotation mechanism unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation mechanism unit 300. As shown in FIG. 39, the rotation mechanism unit 300 can be divided into three parts. And a right link unit 302R disposed on the side.

  The connecting plate 301 is connected to the upper wall portion 57 (see FIG. 33) of the base frame 56 of the front frame 53 in a state where the left link unit 302L and the right link unit 302R are attached. The connection plate 301 is made of a steel plate to increase the rigidity of the rotation mechanism unit 300, and includes a horizontal horizontal part 303, an inclined part 304 extending obliquely upward from the front end of the horizontal part 303 toward the front, A vertical portion 305 extending downward from the rear end of the portion 303 in the vertical direction is formed. On the upper side of the horizontal portion 303, a frame movable body control board 306 for performing drive control and light emission control of the frame movable body 400 described later is disposed. The inclined portion 304 attaches an inclined plate 313 of a left link unit 302L, which will be described later, at a left end portion, and attaches an inclined plate 313 of a right link unit 302R, which will be described later, at a right end portion. The vertical portion 305 attaches a protruding plate 314 of the left link unit 302L described later at the left end, and attaches a protruding plate 314 of the right link unit 302R described later at the right end.

  The configurations of the left link unit 302L and the right link unit 302R are symmetrical. Therefore, in the following, the configuration of the left link unit 302L will be described as a representative. When the left link unit 302L and the right link unit 302R are described together, they are simply described as “link unit 302 (rotating shaft moving mechanism)”.

  The left link unit 302L allows the movable frame body 400 to move to a standby position or an operating position. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position, the movable frame body 400 is set in a substantially horizontal state by the link unit 302 as shown in FIG. At this time, the frame movable body 400 has a length in the front-rear direction that is greater than the length in the vertical direction or the length in the left-right direction. On the other hand, when the movable frame body 400 is in the operating position, the movable frame body 400 is inclined by the link unit 302 so as to extend obliquely upward as shown in FIG. At this time, the frame movable body 400 has a length in the vertical direction that is longer than either the length in the front-rear direction or the length in the left-right direction.

  40A is a side view when the left link unit 302L is viewed from the left side, and FIG. 40B is a longitudinal sectional view of the left link unit 302L. As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40A and 40B, the left link unit 302L includes a main body case 310, a gear mechanism 320, a rotating plate 330, a mounting member 340, a linear motion member 350, and a rotating member. 360 mainly. Hereinafter, each member will be described with reference to the case where the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the main body case 310 is long and upright in the front-rear direction. A rotation motor 311 is integrally assembled on the inner side surface (right side surface) of the main body case 310. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40A, a concave portion 312 that is recessed inward is formed on the outer side surface (left side surface) of the main body case 310 (see FIG. 36). As shown in FIG. 39, an inclined plate 313 that is inclined obliquely upward toward the front is provided at the upper part on the rear side of the main body case 310, and above the rear end of the main body case 310. A protruding plate 314 that protrudes is provided. Further, a standby photo sensor 315 is provided at a lower portion on the front side of the main body case 310.

  The rotary motor 311 (driving means) applies a rotational force to the gear mechanism 320 described later. The rotary motor 311 is a stepping motor that is driven based on the management of the number of steps (pulse signal output control). The recess 312 is formed with a through hole 312a penetrating in the left-right direction. The through hole 312a is for exposing a hexagonal shaft portion 321a provided in the first gear 321 of the gear mechanism 320 described later to the outside. Thus, when the link unit 302 is viewed from the outside, the hexagonal shaft portion 321a appears to be exposed (see FIG. 36). As described above, the inclined plate 313 is attached to the left side of the inclined portion 304 of the connecting plate 301. As described above, the protruding plate 314 is attached to the left side of the vertical portion 305 of the connecting plate 301. The standby photosensor 315 includes a light emitting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit. When light from the light emitting unit is blocked by a shielding unit 331 of the rotating plate 330 described later, the rotating plate The position of 330 is detected.

  As shown in FIG. 40B, the gear mechanism 320 includes a first gear 321, a second gear 322, a third gear 323, a fourth gear 324, a fifth gear 325, and a sixth gear 326. The seventh gear 327, the eighth gear 328, and the ninth gear 329 are mainly provided. The first gear 321 is connected to the rotation shaft 311 a of the rotary motor 311. Therefore, when the rotary motor 311 rotates the rotary shaft 311a, the first gear 321 is also rotated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40A, the first gear 321 is formed with a hexagonal shaft portion 321a extending toward the outside (the back side of the drawing). As described above, the hexagonal shaft portion 321a (operation means) penetrates the through hole 312a formed in the concave portion 312 of the main body case 310 and is exposed to the outside. Therefore, for example, an employee of a game hall (hall) can rotate the first gear 321 by rotating the hexagonal shaft portion 321a using a hexagon wrench (dedicated tool). The effect that the hexagonal shaft portion 321a can be rotated will be described later.

  The second gear 322 meshes with the first gear 321. The third gear 323 is arranged on the outer side (the back side in the drawing) with respect to the second gear 322, and can rotate together with the second gear 322. The fourth gear 324 meshes with the third gear 323. The fifth gear 325 meshes with the fourth gear 324. The sixth gear 326 is disposed on the inner side (the front side in the drawing) with respect to the fifth gear 325 and can rotate integrally with the fifth gear 325. The seventh gear 327 meshes with the sixth gear 326. The eighth gear 328 meshes with the seventh gear 327. The ninth gear 329 meshes with the eighth gear 328. A connection pin 370 extending in the left-right direction at the shaft center O1 is connected to the ninth gear 329 so as to be integrally rotatable.

  Thus, in the gear mechanism 320, when the rotation shaft 311 a rotates by driving the rotation motor 311, the first gear 321, the second gear 322, the third gear 323, the fourth gear 324, the fifth gear 325, the sixth gear 326, The seventh gear 327, the eighth gear 328, and the ninth gear 329 rotate. Thereby, the connecting pin 370 connected to the ninth gear 329 also rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the rotating plate 330 (rotating body) is a long plate member, and extends obliquely downward toward the front. The upper end portion of the rotating plate 330 is connected to the connecting pin 370. Therefore, the rotating plate 330 can rotate around the axis center O <b> 1 as the connecting pin 370 rotates. That is, when the rotary motor 311 is driven, the rotary plate 330 can rotate about the axis O1 via the gear mechanism 320.

  A fan-shaped shielding part 331 is formed below the rotating plate 330. In the state shown in FIG. 39, the shielding portion 331 enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the standby photosensor 315 and blocks light from the light receiving portion (see FIG. 41A). Thereby, the position of the rotating plate 330 is detected. That is, it is detected that the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position. As shown in FIG. 39, a rotating pin 332 extending inward (rightward) is integrally attached to the lower end portion of the rotating plate 330. The rotating pin 332 is for assembling a mounting member 340, which will be described later, rotatably.

  The attachment member 340 (link member) is for attaching the frame movable body 400 and attaching the front cover 260 (see FIG. 38). As shown in FIG. 39, the attachment member 340 includes a placement portion 341 formed in an L shape in the horizontal direction and an upright portion 342 standing in the vertical direction. The mounting portion 341 fixes a U-shaped portion 401a of a mounting bracket 401 of the frame movable body 400 described later. The standing portion 342 fixes an I-shaped portion 401b of a mounting bracket 401 of the movable frame body 400 described later on the inner side surface on the front side, and a lower end portion 266 on the left side of the front cover 260 (see FIG. 38B). Is fixed. Thus, the frame movable body 400 and the front cover 260 are attached to the attachment member 340. Further, the rear side of the upright portion 342 is assembled so as to be rotatable around the rotation pin 332 (axial center O2) of the rotating plate 330. Further, an assembly pin 343 (refer to the broken line in FIG. 39) extending toward the outside (left side) is integrally attached to the upper end portion of the upright portion 342. The assembly pin 343 is for assembling a linear motion member 350, which will be described later, in a rotatable manner.

  The linear motion member 350 (linear motion body) linearly moves in the direction indicated by the arrow X3 in FIG. The linear motion member 350 is disposed in front of the main body case 310, and has a slider 351 extending in the direction indicated by the arrow X3 in FIG. The slider 351 is slidably attached to a slide rail 316 provided on the front side of the main body case. Thus, the linear motion member 350 can be linearly moved with respect to the main body case 310 by sliding the slider 351 with respect to the slide rail 316 in the direction indicated by the arrow X3 in FIG.

  However, the linear motion member 350 is rotatably assembled to the assembly pin 343 attached to the upper end portion of the upright portion 342 of the attachment member 340, although it can only move linearly. Therefore, in the relationship between the linear motion member 350 and the attachment member 340, the attachment member 340 can rotate around the assembly pin 343 with respect to the linear motion member 350 that linearly moves. In short, the assembly pin 343 moves linearly along with the linear movement in the direction indicated by the arrow X3 (see FIG. 40B) of the linear motion member 350. The rotation pin 332 rotates with the rotation around the axis center O1 of the rotation plate 330. Therefore, the attachment member 340 is a link member that can rotate with respect to the rotation pin 332 that rotates around the axis O1, and that can rotate with respect to the assembly pin 343 that moves linearly in the direction indicated by the arrow X3. ing.

  The rotating member 360 rotates with the upper lid member 240 (see FIG. 36) attached. That is, the upper lid member 240 rotates with the rotating member 360. As shown in FIG. 39, the rotating member 360 is disposed in the upper part of the center of the main body case 310 in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a thin plate-like substantially egg shape. The rotating member 360 has a mounting portion 361 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape in the upper part on the front side, and a cover member 362 on the inner side (right side).

  The attachment portion 361 is for attaching the left end portion of the rear plate 242 of the upper lid member 240 on the upper surface. The attachment portion 361 of the rotating member 360 of the right link unit 302R is adapted to attach the right end portion of the rear plate 242 of the upper lid member 240. Here, FIG. 41A shows a state where the cover member 362 of the rotating member 360 is removed. As shown in FIG. 41A, the rotating member 360 is formed with a first long hole 363 formed in an arc shape and a second long hole 364 in which the linear and arc-shaped portions are connected. ing.

  Two fixing pins 317 and 318 extending inward (rightward) from the main body case 310 are inserted through the first long hole 363. The fixing pins 317 and 318 are fixed up and down with respect to the main body case 310, and guide the movement of the first long hole 363. Thus, the rotating member 360 is assembled so as to be slidable (rotatable) in an arc shape along the first long hole 363. The rotating member 360 can slide in an arc shape from the state shown in FIG. 41A until the upper end of the first long hole 363 contacts the fixing pin 317 as shown in FIG. 42A.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, a guide pin 333 extending inward (rightward) from the upper end of the rotating plate 330 is inserted into the second long hole 364. The upper end portion of the rotating plate 330 has a triangular shape, and a guide pin 333 is attached. The guide pin 333 moves along the second long hole 364 as the rotating plate 330 rotates. Thus, the rotation member 360 can slide (rotate) in an arc shape along the first long hole 363 as described above, as the guide pin 333 moves along the second long hole 364. As shown in FIG. 43B, the rotating plate 330 moves around the axis center O1 as the guide pin 333 moves downward along the second long hole 364, as shown in FIG. Can be rotated.

  Next, the operation of the left link unit 302L until the movable frame body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41A shows the left link unit 302L when the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position. In the state shown in FIG. 41A, the rotating plate 330 extends obliquely downward toward the front. The frame movable body 400 is long in the front-rear direction. This frame movable body 400 has the form (design) of the face of the hero character of this pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. Therefore, when the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position, the face of the hero character faces upward. In the state shown in FIG. 41A, the attachment portion 361 of the rotating member 360 extends in the substantially horizontal direction, and the upper lid member 240 attached to the attachment portion 361 also faces in the substantially horizontal direction (strictly speaking, forward). Slightly diagonally below). Further, in the state shown in FIG. 41A, it is detected that the shielding portion 331 of the rotating plate 330 has entered between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the standby photosensor 315 and the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position. Has been. In the following description, when the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction is described, the description will be made with reference to the drawing being viewed.

  When the rotary motor 311 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 41A, the rotary plate 330 rotates around the axis O1 in the clockwise direction. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 41B, the rotating pin 332 of the rotating plate 330 moves forward and upward. Further, the linear motion member 350 linearly moves forward away from the main body case 310, and the attachment member 340 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation pin 332. As a result, the rear end portion of the movable frame body 400 moves forward and upward. That is, as shown in FIG. 41B from the state shown in FIG. 41A, the top of the hero character rises forward. Further, as the guide pin 333 moves along the second long hole 364 of the rotating member 360, the rotating member 360 rotates so that the upper end of the first long hole 363 approaches the fixing pin 317. Accordingly, the upper lid member 240 attached to the attachment portion 361 of the rotating member 360 rotates clockwise so that the front end side (the left side in FIG. 41A) rises. In the state shown in FIG. 41B, since the shielding portion 331 of the rotating plate 330 has not entered between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the standby photosensor 315, detection by the standby photosensor 315 is not performed. . 42A and 42B and FIGS. 43A and 43B described later, since the shielding portion 331 of the rotating plate 330 moves away from the standby photosensor 315, detection by the standby photosensor 315 is performed. Is never done.

  When the rotary motor 311 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 41B, the rotary plate 330 further rotates clockwise around the axis center O1. As a result, as shown in FIG. 42A, the rotating plate 330 extends substantially in the horizontal direction, and the position of the rotating pin 332 is approximately the foremost position. Further, the linear motion member 350 linearly moves forward so as to be further away from the main body case 310, and the attachment member 340 further rotates counterclockwise around the rotation pin 332. Thereby, the rear end part of the frame movable body 400 further moves forward and upward. That is, as shown in FIG. 42 (A) from the state shown in FIG. 41 (B), the top of the hero character gets up further forward. Further, the guide pin 333 moves along the second long hole 364 of the rotating member 360, so that the rotating member 360 rotates until the upper end of the first long hole 363 contacts the fixed pin 317. Thereby, the upper side cover member 240 attached to the attachment part 361 of the rotation member 360 rotates clockwise so that the front end side rises further. Since the upper end of the first long hole 363 is in contact with the fixing pin 317, the rotating member 360 cannot further rotate from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the upper lid member 240 attached to the attachment portion 361 of the rotating member 360 does not rotate so as to rise further from the state shown in FIG.

  When the rotary motor 311 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 42A, the rotary plate 330 further rotates clockwise around the axis center O1. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 42B, the rotating plate 330 extends slightly obliquely upward toward the front, and the position of the rotating pin 332 moves slightly rearward and upward. Further, the linear motion member 350 hardly moves linearly with respect to the main body case 310, and the attachment member 340 further rotates counterclockwise around the rotation pin 332. Thereby, the rear end part of the frame movable body 400 further moves forward and upward. That is, as shown in FIG. 42B from the state shown in FIG. 42A, the top of the hero character gets up further forward. At this time, although the rotating member 360 does not rotate, the guide pin 333 moves downward along the second long hole 364 of the rotating member 360. In the state shown in FIG. 42B, a movable space KK is formed in which an ear member 540, which will be described later, can move from the retracted position to the protruding position through the retracted position. In the subsequent state shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, the movable space KK is formed.

  When the rotary motor 311 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 42B, the rotary plate 330 further rotates clockwise around the axis center O1. As a result, as shown in FIG. 43A, the rotating plate 330 extends obliquely upward toward the front so as to further increase the inclination angle, and the position of the rotating pin 332 moves backward and upward. Further, the linear motion member 350 moves linearly so as to approach the main body case 310, and the mounting member 340 further rotates counterclockwise around the rotation pin 332. Thereby, the frame movable body 400 stands up in a substantially vertical direction and becomes long in the vertical direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 43A from the state shown in FIG. 42B, the hero character gets up so that the face faces the front.

  When the rotary motor 311 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 43A, the rotary plate 330 further rotates clockwise around the axis center O1. As a result, as shown in FIG. 43B, the rotating plate 330 extends obliquely upward toward the front so as to further increase the inclination angle, and the position of the rotating pin 332 moves backward and upward. Further, the linear movement member 350 moves linearly until it comes into contact with the main body case 310, and the mounting member 340 further rotates counterclockwise around the rotation pin 332. Accordingly, the movable frame body 400 is inclined so as to extend obliquely upward toward the front. That is, as shown in FIG. 43 (B) from the state shown in FIG. 43 (A), the face of the hero character starts to look diagonally downward. In this way, the movement of the movable frame body 400 is completed. That is, the frame movable body 400 moves to the operating position. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43B, the left link unit 302L is not provided with a photosensor for detecting that the movable frame body 400 is in the operating position.

  FIG. 44A is a perspective view showing the relationship between the movable frame body 400 shown in FIG. 42A and the right link unit 302R. FIG. 44B is a perspective view showing the relationship between the movable frame body 400 and the right link unit 302R shown in FIG. As can be seen from FIGS. 44 (A) and 44 (B), in this embodiment, it is possible to give a strong impact by making the face of the main character appear to rise forward. That is, by moving the vertically movable frame movable body 400 so as to approach forward, it is possible to show the player the powerful movement of the movable frame body 400.

  The operation of the left link unit 302L until the movable frame body 400 moves from the operating position to the standby position is the reverse of the above description. That is, since it operates as shown in FIG. 43 (B) → FIG. 43 (A) → FIG. 42 (B) → FIG. 42 (A) → FIG. 41 (B) → FIG. .

  Next, based on FIGS. 45-54, the structure of the frame movable body 400 is demonstrated. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the movable frame body 400. As shown in FIG. 45, the frame movable body 400 (frame movable member) can be divided into four parts, and includes a mounting bracket 401, an ear unit 402 disposed above the mounting bracket 401, and an upper side of the ear unit 402. A face unit 403 arranged and a nose member 404 arranged above the face unit 403 are provided.

  The attachment bracket 401 is attached to the attachment member 340 of the link unit 302 with the ear unit 402 attached. The mounting bracket 401 is made of a steel plate to increase the rigidity of the movable frame body 400, and has a U-shaped portion 401a formed in a substantially U shape and a pair of I shapes formed in a substantially I shape. Part 401b. The U-shaped portion 401a is disposed in the horizontal direction, and is attached to the placement portion 341 of the attachment member 340 of the link unit 302 as described above. Each I-shaped portion 401b extends upward from both ends on the front side of the U-shaped portion 401a. These I-shaped portions 401b are attached to the upright portions 342 of the attachment members 340 of the link unit 302 together with the lower end portion 266 (see FIG. 38B) on the left side of the front cover 260 and the lower end portion (not shown) on the right side. It is done. In this way, the front cover 260, the frame movable body 400, and the link unit 302 are assembled together.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the ear unit 402 mainly includes a left ear movable body 500L, a right ear movable body 500R, and a base plate 600 for assembling the left ear movable body 500L and the right ear movable body 500R. The configurations of the left ear movable body 500L and the right ear movable body 500R are almost symmetrical. Therefore, below, it demonstrates centering on each structural member of the right ear movable body 500R, and abbreviate | omits description of each structural member of the left ear movable body 500L. When the left ear movable body 500L and the right ear movable body 500R are collectively described, they are simply described as the “ear movable body 500”.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 (A) and 46 (B), the right-ear movable body 500R has a thin plate-like heel plate 510 extending in the vertical direction, a heel member 520 simulating the shape of the heel, and linearly extending in the vertical direction. It mainly includes a linear motion rail 530, a substantially triangular pyramid shaped ear member 540 extending in the vertical direction, and a linear motion motor 550 attached to the flange plate 510.

  Here, the right ear movable body 500R of the present embodiment is configured such that the ear member 540 can move to the storage position, the retracted position, and the protruding position. 47A shows a front view when the ear member 540 is in the storage position, and FIG. 47B shows a rear view when the ear member 540 is in the storage position. 48A shows a front view when the ear member 540 is in the retracted position, and FIG. 48B shows a rear view when the ear member 540 is in the retracted position. 49A shows a front view when the ear member 540 is in the protruding position, and FIG. 49B shows a rear view when the ear member 540 is in the protruding position. 47 to 49, each direction is shown with reference to a state where the ear unit 402 stands in the vertical direction (a state immediately before the movable frame body 400 moves to the operating position).

  As shown in FIG. 46 (A), the eaves plate 510 has a mounting hole 511 extending in the front-rear direction on the inner side (left end portion) of the lower end. As shown in FIG. 47A, a swing shaft 610 fixed to the base plate 600 is inserted into the mounting hole 511. Therefore, the collar plate 510 can swing (rotate) about the swing shaft 610. Further, as shown in FIG. 46A, the eaves plate 510 has a storage photosensor 512 on the outer side (right end) of the lower end, and a protruding photosensor 513 on the inner side (left end) of the upper part. Yes. The storage photosensor 512 detects that the ear member 540 is in the storage position. That is, as shown in FIG. 47A, the storage photosensor 512 detects the position (storage position) of the ear member 540 when light from the light emitting unit is blocked by a shielding unit 544 of the ear member 540 described later. . The protruding photosensor 513 detects that the ear member is in the protruding position. That is, as shown in FIG. 49A, the projecting photosensor 513 detects the position (projecting position) of the ear member 540 when the light from the light emitting unit is blocked by the shielding unit 544 of the ear member.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (B), the heel plate 510 is attached with swing pins 514 and 515 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The swing pins 514 and 515 are movable along swing holes 640 formed in the base plate 600 described later. That is, the rocking pins 514 and 515 guide rocking around the rocking shaft 610 of the saddle plate 510. In this way, in the saddle plate 510, the swing pin 515 on the outer side swings from the position (see FIG. 47B) where the swing pin 514 on the inner side (left side) contacts the inner end (left end) of the swing hole 640. It can swing to a position (see FIGS. 48B and 49B) that contacts the outer end (right end) of the moving hole 640.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, the flange member 520 is integrally assembled on the outer side (right end portion) on the upper side of the flange plate 510. Accordingly, when the heel plate 510 swings around the swing shaft 610, the heel member 520 swings (see FIGS. 47A and 48A). However, unlike the ear member 540 described later, the hook member 520 only swings.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, the linear motion rail 530 is an assembly of the ear member 540 so as to be linearly movable. The linear motion rail 530 is integrally assembled to the outside (right end portion) of the eaves plate 510. Therefore, when the heel plate 510 swings around the swing shaft 610, the ear member 540 assembled to the linear motion rail 530 is also swinged (FIGS. 47A and 48A). reference).

  As shown in FIG. 46B, the ear member 540 is integrally assembled with a linear slider 541 extending in the vertical direction on the rear surface side. The linear motion slider 541 is slidably assembled along the linear motion rail 530. Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46A, a contact portion 542 that protrudes downward is formed at the lower end of the outer side (right side) of the ear member 540. As shown in FIG. 47 (A) or FIG. 48 (A), the abutting portion 542 abuts on a receiving member 620 formed on a base plate 600, which will be described later. It is for regulating movement.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46B, the ear member 540 has a rack 543 on the inner side (left side) of the linear motion rail 530. The rack 543 is formed in parallel with the linear motion rail 530 and meshes with a pinion 551 connected to the rotation shaft of the linear motion motor 550. Accordingly, when the linear motor 550 is driven, the pinion 551 rotates with respect to the rack 543, and the rack 543 moves linearly. As a result, the ear member 540 to which the rack 543 is attached can move linearly along the linear motion rail 530.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46A, the ear member 540 has a shielding portion 544 on the inner side (left side) of the lower end. As shown in FIG. 47A, the shielding portion 544 shields light from the light emitting portion of the storage photosensor 512 when the ear member 540 is in the storage position, as shown in FIG. When the ear member 540 is in the protruding position, the light from the light emitting portion of the protruding photosensor 513 is blocked. However, the shielding portion 544 does not block the light from the light emitting portion of the storage photosensor 512 when the ear member 540 is in the retracted position as shown in FIG. The reason will be described later.

  The direct acting motor 550 can cause the ear member 540 to move linearly by rotating the pinion 551. This direct acting motor 550 is a stepping motor that is driven based on the management of the number of steps (pulse signal output control). In this embodiment, the linear motor 550 can also tilt the ear member 540 by rotating the pinion 551. The reason will be described later. As shown in FIG. 47B, the linear motor 550 is inserted into an insertion hole 650 formed in a base plate 600 described later. Therefore, when the flange plate 510 swings around the swing shaft 610, the direct acting motor 550 attached to the flange plate 510 can swing left and right in the insertion hole 650 (FIG. 47B). 48B and FIG. 49B).

  The base plate 600 is fixed to the mounting portion 341 of the mounting bracket 401 in a state where the ear movable body 500 is attached (see FIG. 45). The base plate 600 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and its configuration is symmetrical. Therefore, in the following, each component on the right side of the base plate 600 will be described as a representative. 47A and 47B, the base plate 600 has a swing shaft 610, a receiving member 620, a coil spring 630, a swing hole 640, and an insertion hole 650. As shown in FIG. 47B, an ear control board 660 is assembled to the base plate 600.

  The swing shaft 610 is the center of swing (rotation) of the ear member 540, and is disposed near the center in the left-right direction at the lower end of the base plate 600. The swing shaft 610 is provided so as to extend forward from the base plate 600, and is inserted through the mounting hole 511 (see FIG. 46A) of the flange plate 510 as described above.

  The receiving member 620 (regulating portion) regulates the downward movement of the ear member 540 by contacting the contact portion 542 of the ear member 540. As shown in FIG. 47 (A), the receiving member 620 is disposed in the lower right portion of the base plate 600 and is formed in a dogleg shape (see FIG. 45). When the contact portion 542 of the ear member 540 and the receiving member 620 are in contact, the ear member 540 to which a driving force (direct power from the pinion 551) is applied from the linear motor 550 is connected to the contact portion 542. Tilt is performed with the contact portion TB with the receiving member 620 as a fulcrum. This point will be described later.

  The coil spring 630 is for applying an urging force (contraction force) to the collar plate 510. As shown in FIG. 47A, the inner end of coil spring 630 (the end closer to the center in the left-right direction in FIG. 47A) is attached to saddle plate 510. On the other hand, the outer end portion of the coil spring 630 is attached to the base plate 600. The coil spring 630 is in a normal state in the state shown in FIG. 48 (A) or FIG. 49 (A). Therefore, the saddle plate 510 does not receive the contraction force from the coil spring 630.

  On the other hand, the coil spring 630 is in the extended state in the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the eaves plate 510 receives a rightward force due to the contraction force from the coil spring 630 (see the arrow in FIG. 47A). However, at this time, the pinion 551 connected to the linear motor 550 is meshed with the rack 543 in a state where the saddle plate 510 is attached with the linear motor 550 and there is no driving force from the linear motor 550. (See FIG. 46B). For this reason, a rotational force sufficient to swing the saddle plate 510 against the meshing force between the rack 543 and the pinion 551 does not act, and the state shown in FIG. 47A is maintained.

  The swing hole 640 is for guiding the swing of the saddle plate 510 (swing pins 514, 515) (see FIGS. 47B, 48B, and 49B). As shown in FIG. 47 (B), the rocking hole 640 is formed in an arc shape with the rocking shaft 610 as the center, and through the rocking pins 514 and 515 attached to the flange plate 510. Yes.

  The insertion hole 650 allows the linear motor 550 attached to the saddle plate 510 to move when the saddle plate 510 swings (FIG. 47B, FIG. 48B, FIG. 49 (B)). That is, the shape of the insertion hole 650 is formed so as not to contact the moving linear motor 550.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (B), the ear control board 660 is disposed on the back surface (rear surface) side of the base plate 600, and is used to control the drive of the ear movable body 500 (linear motion motor 550). is there. The ear control board 660 is connected to a connector connected to one end of a harness 850 (see FIG. 53A) described later.

  Next, the operation of the right ear movable body 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the operation of the left ear movable body 500L is the same as the operation of the right ear movable body 500R, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the present embodiment, the right ear movable body 500R is characterized in that the ear member 540 can not only move linearly but also tilt using the driving force of one linear motion motor 550 (drive source).

  In the state shown in FIG. 47A, the ear member 540 is in the storage position. At this time, as described above, the saddle plate 510 receives a force in the right direction from the coil spring 630, but the saddle plate 510 swings around the swing shaft 610 by the meshing force between the pinion 551 and the rack 543. It is supposed not to. Further, at this time, as shown in FIG. 47A, the storage photosensor 512 detects the position (storage position) of the ear member 540, and as shown in FIG. 514 is in contact with the inner end of the swing hole 640. Further, as shown in FIG. 47A, the contact portion 542 of the ear member 540 and the receiving member 620 are in contact.

  When the linear motor 550 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 47A, the pinion 551 engaged with the rack 543 starts to rotate. As a result, the meshing force described above is released, and the heel plate 510 receives the rightward force (see the arrow in FIG. 47A) from the coil spring 630 as it is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 48A from the state shown in FIG. 47A, the saddle plate 510 swings to the right with the swing shaft 610 as the center. Further, at this time, the ear member 540 tilts rightward with the contact portion TB of the contact portion 542 and the receiving member 620 as a fulcrum. That is, due to the driving force of the linear motor 550, the rack 543 tilts to the right with respect to the rotating pinion 551 with the contact portion TB as a fulcrum. Therefore, the ear member 540 further tilts to the right with respect to the heel plate 510 that has swung to the right. As a result, the ear member 540 moves (tilts) to the retracted position so as to stand up and down, and the storage photosensor 512 does not detect the position of the ear member 540. Further, at this time, as shown in FIG. 48B, the swing pin 515 on the outer side is moved until it contacts the outer end of the swing hole 640.

  When the linear motion motor 550 is further driven from the state shown in FIG. 48A, the rack 543 linearly moves upward while the pinion 551 continues to rotate at that position. That is, the ear member 540 to which the rack 543 is attached linearly moves upward along the linear motion rail 530. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 48A from the state shown in FIG. 47A, the ear member 540 moves straight upward until it reaches the protruding position, and the protruding photosensor 513 moves to the position of the ear member 540 (the protruding position). ) Will be detected. In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to move the ear member 540 in two directions, that is, a direction in which the ear member 540 is tilted and a direction in which the ear member 540 is linearly moved by one drive source (linear motion motor 550).

  In the above, the operation of the right ear movable body 500R when the ear member 540 moves from the storage position to the retracted position to the protruding position has been described based on FIGS. 47⇒48⇒49. Therefore, in the following, the operation of the right ear movable body 500R when the ear member 540 moves from the protruding position to the retracted position to the storage position will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 49⇒48⇒47.

  When the linear motor 550 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 49A, the pinion 551 engaged with the rack 543 starts to rotate. As a result, the ear member 540 at the protruding position (first position) moves downward along the linear motion rail 530 together with the rack 543. Then, as shown in FIG. 48A, when the ear member 540 moves downward until the contact portion 542 and the receiving member 620 come into contact with each other, the ear member 540 becomes the retracted position (second position).

  After that, when the linear motor 550 is further driven from the state shown in FIG. 48A, the ear member 540 cannot move further downward, so that the contact portion TB between the contact portion 542 and the receiving member 620 is used as a fulcrum. Tilt to the left. Further, at this time, the rack 543 attached to the ear member 540 tilts to the left together with the pinion 551, and the eaves plate 510 to which the pinion 551 is attached via the linear motor 550 is contracted by the coil spring 630 that extends. Against this, it swings to the left around the swing shaft 610. As a result, the collar plate 510 swings until the inner swing pin 514 comes into contact with the inner end of the swing hole 640 as shown in FIG. 47 (B), and the ear member 540 moves as shown in FIG. 47 (A). As shown in FIG. 6, the shielding unit 544 tilts until the light from the light emitting unit of the storage photosensor 512 is blocked. In this way, the ear member 540 becomes the storage position (third position).

  After the ear member 540 has moved to the storage position shown in FIG. 47A, when the drive of the linear motor 550 is stopped, a meshing force between the pinion 551 and the rack 543 is generated. This engagement force is larger than the contraction force (see the arrow in FIG. 47A) by the coil spring 630. Therefore, the gutter plate 510 to which the pinion 551 is attached via the linear motor 550 can remain in the storage position shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48A from the state shown in FIG. 49A, the direction in which the ear member 540 moves along the rack 543 is the “first reference direction”. As shown in FIG. 47A from the state shown in FIG. 48A, the direction in which the ear member 540 tilts left and right with the contact portion TB as a fulcrum is the “second reference direction”. Further, the ear member 540 corresponds to a “movable body”, and the heel plate 510 and the heel member 520 correspond to a “production body”.

  Next, the configuration of the face unit 403 (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to FIGS. The face unit 403 imitates the form of the face of the main character of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and as shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B, a base member 710, a pair of left and right eye members 720, It mainly includes a jaw member 730, a face control board 740 (see FIG. 51B), and a tilting mechanism 750. 50 to 52 show a state where a nose member 404 (see FIG. 45) imitating the shape of the nose is assembled to the face unit 403. Each direction is shown with reference to a state in which the face unit 403 stands up in the vertical direction (a state immediately before the movable frame body 400 moves to the operating position).

  As shown in FIG. 50A, the base member 710 assembles the nose member 404, each eye member 720, the jaw member 730, and the tilting mechanism 750. A head shape is integrally formed on the upper side of the base member 710, and a pair of fitting portions 711 (FIG. 45) for fitting each eye member 720 to the central portion in the vertical direction of the base member 710. Reference) is provided. As shown in FIG. 51B, the base member 710 has a tilting shaft 712 extending in the left-right direction attached to the lower rear portion.

  Each eye member 720 is formed in a cylindrical shape and a dome shape on the front side, and accommodates a light emitting member (not shown) capable of emitting light inside. Therefore, in each eye member 720, it is possible to give the impression that the eyes are shining because the light emitting member emits light. After each eye member 720 is fitted in each fitting portion 711 of the base member 710 described above, the nose member 404 is assembled to the center portion in the vertical direction of the base member 710 (see FIG. 45).

  The jaw member 730 simulates the shape of the jaw, and can be tilted between a closed position shown in FIG. 50A and an open position shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 51B, the jaw member 730 is assembled so as to be tiltable around the tilting axis 712. A winding spring 713 is assembled to the tilting shaft 712, and a force in a direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. 51B acts on the jaw member 730 as an urging force of the winding spring 713. Accordingly, the jaw member 730 is normally in the closed position shown in FIG. 50A due to the urging force of the winding spring 713. On the other hand, when an external force opposite to the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 51B acts against the biasing force of the winding spring 713, the jaw member 730 can tilt to the open position shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the face control board 740 is arranged inside the upper portion of the base member 710 and controls the light emission of the light emission members of the respective eye members 720, and also includes a jaw member 730 (described later). The drive control of the tilt motor 751) is performed. Further, a number of face LEDs 741 that can be turned on are arranged on the face control board 740. The face control board 740 can also perform lighting control of these face LEDs 741.

  The tilt mechanism 750 is a mechanism for allowing the jaw member 730 to tilt, and is provided below the base member 710. As shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B, the tilt mechanism 750 includes a tilt motor 751 for tilting the jaw member 730. As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the tilt mechanism 750 mainly includes a small-diameter rotating gear 752, a large-diameter linkage gear 753, and a linkage plate 754 extending in the front-rear direction. The tilting motor 751 is a stepping motor that is driven based on the management of the number of steps (pulse signal output control).

  The tilting motor 751 has a rotating gear 752 attached to its rotating shaft. Therefore, when the tilt motor 751 is driven, the rotation gear 752 rotates. The rotation gear 752 meshes with the linkage gear 753 as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the linkage gear 753 has a linkage projection 753a protruding upward, and as shown in FIG. 51 (A), a linkage shaft 753b extending from the linkage projection 753a to the left is provided. Have.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the linkage plate 754 is assembled so as to be rotatable around the tilting shaft 712 at the rear end portion. The connecting plate 754 is formed with an oval connecting hole 754a that is long in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 51A, the linkage hole 754a is inserted through the linkage shaft 753b of the rotary gear 752, and guides the movement of the linkage shaft 753b along the linkage hole 754a (FIG. B) and FIG. 52 (A)). Further, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 51B, the connecting plate 754 has a tilting portion 754b that stands up from the upper end of the rear end portion. The tilting portion 754b is disposed immediately behind the receiving portion 731 (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 51B) provided on the jaw member 730.

  In the face unit 403 configured as described above, the jaw member 730 is tilted from the closed position to the open position by the driving force of the tilt motor 751, and the jaw member 730 is manually tilted from the closed position to the open position. The difference is explained.

  When the tilting motor 751 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 51B, the linkage gear 753 rotates with the rotation of the rotating gear 752. As a result, the linkage shaft 753b of the linkage gear 753 tends to move rearward along the linkage hole 754a of the linkage plate 754. At this time, as shown in FIG. 52A, the connecting plate 754 tilts around the tilting shaft 712 in the direction indicated by the arrow. Further, the tilting portion 754 b provided on the linkage plate 754 tends to tilt together with the receiving portion 731 provided on the jaw member 730. As a result, the jaw member 730 tilts to the open position against the urging force of the winding spring 713. When the tilting motor 751 is driven in reverse to the above, the tilting mechanism 750 operates in reverse to the above, and the jaw member 730 tilts from the open position shown in FIG. 52 (A) to the closed position shown in FIG. 51 (B). To do.

  On the other hand, when the jaw member 730 is manually tilted to the open position from the state shown in FIG. 51B, the jaw member 730 is rotated around the tilt axis 712 in the direction opposite to the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. Rotate. Thereby, the jaw member 730 tilts to the open position as shown in FIG. 52A against the urging force of the winding spring 713. At this time, the tilting mechanism 750 remains in the state shown in FIG. That is, no manual external force is applied (transmitted) to the linkage plate 754, the linkage gear 753, the rotation gear 752, and the tilting motor 751. When the manual external force is released from the jaw member 730, the jaw member 730 is tilted from the open position shown in FIG. 52B to the closed position shown in FIG.

  Thus, in this embodiment, even if the player or the like is mischievous and manually tilts the jaw member 730 from the closed position to the open position, an excessive external force acts on the linkage plate 754, the linkage gear 753, the rotation gear 752, and the tilt motor 751. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the tilt mechanism 750 and the tilt motor 751 to fail.

  Next, the configuration of the lower cover 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35, 37, and 53A. The lower cover 800 is assembled to the lower side of the movable frame body 400 as described above (see FIG. 37), and forms the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 as shown in FIG. . As shown in FIG. 53A, the lower cover 800 includes a main body cover 810, a left fitting plate 820L, a right fitting plate 820R, a follower plate 830, and a harness cover 840. FIG. 53A is an exploded perspective view of the lower cover 800 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the main body cover 810 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and has a substantially T-shaped fitting hole 811 in the center. The fitting hole 811 is for fitting the left fitting plate 820L and the right fitting plate 820R to the left and right. Even if the left fitting plate 820L and the right fitting plate 820R are fitted in the fitting hole 811, an I-shaped straight hole 812 (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 53A) is still formed. Therefore, in order to make the straight hole 812 difficult to see, the tracking plate 830 is disposed on the front side of the straight hole 812, and the harness cover 840 is disposed on the rear side of the straight hole 812 (see FIG. 35).

  The body cover 810 has a pair of front assembly holes 813 on the left and right sides of the front end of the fitting hole 811. Each front side assembly hole 813 has a concave shape that is recessed upward, and is for assembling each front side pin 831 of a follow-up plate 830 to be described later. The main body cover 810 has a pair of rear assembly holes 814 on the left and right sides of the fitting hole 811 closer to the rear. Each rear side assembly hole 814 has a concave shape that is recessed upward, and is for assembling each support pin 841 of the harness cover 840 described later.

  The configurations of the left fitting plate 820L and the right fitting plate 820R are symmetrical as shown in FIG. Therefore, the left fitting plate 820L and the right fitting plate 820R are collectively referred to as “fitting plate 820”, and the configuration of the fitting plate 820 will be collectively described below. The fitting plate 820 has a bent portion 821 bent upward from the inside of the semicircular portion. A first notch 822 is formed in the bent portion 821 at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a second notch 823 closer to the rear is formed. The first notch 822 is for supporting each rear pin 832 of the follow-up plate 830 described later in a state where the fitting plate 820 is fitted in the fitting hole 811 of the main body cover 810. The second notch 823 faces the rear assembly hole 814 of the main body cover 810, and is used to rotatably mount each support pin 841 of the harness cover 840 described later.

  The follower plate 830 follows the movement of the front portion 851 of the harness 850 described later. The front portion 851 of the harness 850 is a portion of the harness 850 that is exposed to the front side of the harness cover 840 and is supported by the follower plate 830. The follower plate 830 has front pins 831 on the left and right sides of the front side, and has rear pins 832 on the left and right sides of the rear side. The fitting plate 820 is fitted into the fitting hole 811 in a state where each front pin 831 is assembled in each front assembly hole 813 of the main body cover 810. Thereby, the follower plate 830 is assembled so as to be rotatable around each front pin 831 (see FIG. 37). At this time, each rear pin 832 is supported by the first notch 822 of the fitting plate 820 (see FIG. 37).

  The harness cover 840 is for making it difficult to visually recognize the harness 850 when the lower cover 800 is viewed (see FIG. 35). As shown in FIG. 53A, the harness cover 840 is formed long in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a hollow shape so that the harness 850 can be inserted (covered). The harness cover 840 has support pins 841 on the left and right of the front end, and has an oblong mounting elongated hole 842 on the rear end. As described above, each support pin 841 is assembled in each rear assembly hole 814 and each second notch 823 facing each other in a state where the fitting plate 820 is fitted in the fitting hole 811 of the main body cover 810. Attached. Here, FIG. 53B shows a perspective view of the above-described connecting plate 301 (see FIG. 39) as seen obliquely from below. As shown in FIG. 56B, the connecting plate 301 has a bifurcated member 307 assembled to the lower surface of the horizontal portion 303, and the bifurcated member 307 is provided with a mounting pin 308 extending in the left-right direction. Therefore, the attachment long hole 842 of the harness cover 840 is inserted into the attachment pin 308 of the bifurcated member 307 of the connecting plate 301 (see FIG. 35 or FIGS. 54A and 54B).

  The harness 850 is a collection of a plurality of electrical wires, and connectors (not shown) are connected to both ends. As shown in FIG. 53A, the harness 850 is covered with a harness cover 840, a front portion 851 that is in front of the harness cover 840, and a rear portion 852 that is in the rear of the harness cover 840. have. The connector at the tip of the front portion 851 is connected to the ear control board 660 (see FIG. 47B). The connector at the tip of the rear portion 852 is connected to the frame movable body control board 306 (see FIG. 39).

  Here, the movement of the follower plate 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54A is a cross-sectional perspective view when the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position, and FIG. 54B is a cross-sectional perspective view when the frame movable body 400 is in the operating position. When the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position, as described above, each front pin 831 of the follower plate 830 is rotatably attached to each front assembly hole 813 of the main body cover 810, and each follower plate 830 is rotated. The rear pin 832 is supported by each first notch 822 of the fitting plate 820 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35, the front portion 851 of the harness 850 is hardly visible by the follower plate 830.

  When the movable frame body 400 starts to move from the standby position shown in FIG. 54A toward the operating position, the harness cover 840 moves so as to rise with the mounting pin 308 as the axis. At this time, the front portion 851 of the harness 850 also tries to rise, and the follower plate 830 that supports the front portion of the harness 850 also moves so as to rise about the front pins 831 as the center. That is, the follower plate 830 rises so that each rear pin 832 is separated from the first notch 822 of the fitting plate 820. Thus, since the tracking plate 830 follows the movement of the front portion 851 of the harness 850, the tracking plate 830 can make it difficult to visually recognize the front portion 851 of the harness 850 during the movement of the movable frame body 400 to the operating position. is there. When the movable frame body 400 is in the operating position as shown in FIG. 54B, the follower plate 830 is pivotally supported by the front pins 831 and extends obliquely upward toward the front. Become.

  Thereafter, when the frame movable body 400 starts to move from the operating position shown in FIG. 54B toward the standby position, the follower plate 830 is supported by the front pins 831 and is indicated by an arrow in FIG. 54B. Rotates with its own weight in the direction. Accordingly, the follower plate 830 moves so that each rear pin 832 fits into the first notch 822 of the fitting plate 820 while supporting (following) the front portion 851 of the harness 850. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the front portion 851 of the harness 850 by the tracking plate 830 even while the movable frame body 400 is moving from the operating position toward the standby position. That is, it is possible to make the front portion 851 of the harness 850 difficult to see from the straight hole 812 (see FIG. 53A) of the main body cover 810 with a simple configuration of the follower plate 830 that hangs down under its own weight.

  By the way, in this embodiment, after the movable frame body 400 is moved from the standby position to the operating position, the ear member 540 is moved from the storage position to the protruding position through the retracted position. In the movable body unit 201, as shown in FIG. 43B, when the frame movable body 400 is in the operating position, a movable space KK is formed in which the ear member 540 can move from the storage position to the protruding position. However, as shown in FIG. 1, when the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position, the movable space KK described above is not formed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the link unit 302 (see FIG. 41) is provided with the standby photosensor 315 for detecting the standby position of the movable frame body 400. However, the link unit 302 is not provided with a photosensor for detecting the operating position of the movable frame body 400. Therefore, the state in which the ear member 540 is in the operating position is not grasped in terms of control. Therefore, if the ear member 540 starts to move before the movable space KK is formed, the ear member 540 may come into contact with the connecting plate 301 or the like, and a serious failure may occur. In particular, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper decoration portion 200 of the present embodiment largely protrudes forward toward the player side (front), and thus is disposed at a position close to the player. Therefore, a situation in which the upper decorative portion 200 on which the frame movable body 400 is mounted must be surely avoided in view of safety. As the above countermeasure, since the rotary motor 311 is a stepping motor, there is a method for estimating whether or not the movable frame body 400 is in the operating position only by managing the number of steps of the rotary motor 311 (pulse signal output control). is there. However, the management of the number of steps may be distorted due to the influence of noise or the like, and it cannot be said that it is a perfect method.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the following configuration is used to reliably prevent malfunction of the ear member 540. As shown in FIG. 53A, a shielding protrusion 843 (detection portion) is formed on the rear side of the harness cover 840 (electrical wiring cover). As shown in FIG. 53B, a movable space photosensor 309 is disposed at the front end of the bifurcated member 307 of the connecting plate 301. The movable space photosensor 309 (specific position detecting means) detects that the movable space KK in which the ear member 540 can move from the storage position to the protruding position is formed.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 54A, when the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position, the shielding protrusion 843 of the harness cover 840 does not block the light from the light emitting portion of the movable space photosensor 309. As shown in FIG. 54B, when the frame movable body 400 is in the operating position, the shielding protrusion 843 of the harness cover 840 blocks light from the light emitting portion of the movable space photosensor 309.

  However, in this embodiment, the shield protrusion 843 of the harness cover 840 blocks the light from the light emitting portion of the movable space photosensor 309 before the movable frame body 400 finishes moving to the operating position. Specifically, when the movable frame body 400 reaches the position (specific position) shown in FIG. 42B and the movable space KK is formed, the shielding protrusion 843 is the light emitting portion of the movable space photosensor 309. A movable space photosensor 309 is arranged so as to block light from the light. Therefore, the movable space photosensor 309 continues to output the detection signal until the movable frame body 400 moves from the position shown in FIG. 42B to the operating position in FIG.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the frame movable body 400 (first movable body) is moved from the standby position (first standby position) to the operation position (first operation position) by controlling the output of the pulse signal to the rotary motor 311 (first drive source). ). However, a dedicated movable space photosensor 309 for detecting that the movable space KK has been formed is provided in case the output control of the pulse signal goes wrong. If there is no detection by the movable space photosensor 309, the ear member 540 (second movable body) is not moved from the storage position (second standby position) to the protruding position (second operation position). Therefore, on the condition that the movable space KK is formed, the movement of the ear member 540 to the protruding position can be started, and the malfunction of the ear member 540 can be reliably prevented. As a result, it is possible to avoid a serious failure of the frame movable body 400, and it is possible to ensure the safety of the upper decorative portion 200 that protrudes largely forward toward the player side (front). .

  Here, the shape of the upper decorative portion 200 of this embodiment will be described. This embodiment is characterized in that the frame movable body 400 as large as possible is provided in the upper decorative portion 200 in order to increase the impact caused by the movement of the frame movable body 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper decoration part 200 (movable body unit 201) protrudes forward. Further, the upper decoration portion 200 protrudes upward in advance from the upper edge 50U of the gaming machine frame 50. Here, the upper edge 50U of the gaming machine frame 50 refers to the upper, lower, left and right frame edges (upper edge 50U, lower edge 50D, left edge 50L, right edge 50R, FIG. Means the edge extending in the left-right direction on the upper side. However, if the upper decoration part 200 protrudes too much above the upper edge 50U of the gaming machine frame 50, it may interfere with the data counter 160 (see FIG. 4).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the rear wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is located above the gaming machine frame 50 and ahead of the lower end position P4 of the data counter 160 (data display device 162). The inclined surface is inclined obliquely upward toward the front. Note that the rear wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is specifically an inclined portion 304 (see FIGS. 2 and 39) of the connecting plate 301. In other words, the front wall 53 is horizontal so that the upper wall portion 57 extends forward from the lower end position P4 of the data counter 160, and the inclined portion 304 of the connecting plate 301 is formed from the front end position P5 of the upper wall portion 57. Has been. In addition, the inclination angle φ of the inclined portion 304 (the rear wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200) of the connecting plate 301 is the same as 25 degrees that is the maximum forward inclination angle θ of the data display device 162. Thus, it is possible to avoid interference with the data counter 160 even if the upper decoration part 200 on which the largest movable frame body 400 is mounted projects above the upper edge 50U of the gaming machine frame 50 in advance. is there. Note that, from the viewpoint of avoiding the interference between the rear wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 and the data counter 160, the inclination angle φ described above may of course be 25 degrees or more.

  Here, since the upper decoration part 200 protrudes above the lower end position P4 of the data counter 160, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 3, the lower side of the data counter 160 is visible. Disappear. However, even if the visibility of the data counter 160 is somewhat sacrificed, in the present embodiment, the upper decorative portion 200 is preliminarily placed above the upper edge 50U of the gaming machine frame 50 in order to mount the largest movable frame body 400 on the upper decorative portion 200. It is formed so as to protrude upward.

  Further, in this embodiment, the upper decorative portion 200 is very large in order to mount the large frame movable body 400. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the lower end portion (front lower end portion) on the front side of the upper decorative portion 200 is easily lowered, and is lower than the upper portion 55 a of the glass plate (window portion, window member) 55. is there. In this embodiment, the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55 is above the upper end 3X of the game area 3 in the height direction, and is 50 mm below the uppermost end position (not including the upper end position P7) of the glass plate 55. It is a part of the range (see FIG. 55). Thus, the lower end position P6 on the front side of the upper decorative portion 200 is lower than the upper end position P7 of the glass plate 55. The front lower end position P6 of the upper decorative portion 200 corresponds to the “front lower end portion of the upper decorative portion”. As shown in FIG. 2, the upper end position P7 of the glass plate 55 is the uppermost end position of the portion that can be visually recognized when the glass plate 55 is viewed from the front. As described above, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that the rear of the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55 is difficult to see due to the lower end portion on the front side of the upper decorative portion 200.

  In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the second image display device 7 is arranged above the first image display device 6. The upper portion 7b of the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7 is disposed above the upper end 3X of the game area 3 and behind the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55. Therefore, there may arise a problem that the upper portion 7b of the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7 becomes more difficult to see. A configuration in which the upper decorative portion 200 is disposed above the position shown in FIG. 4 is also conceivable. It becomes easy to interfere.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower surface of the lower wall portion (lower end portion) of the upper decorative portion 200 is an inclined surface extending obliquely upward toward the rear. Note that the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is specifically the lower cover 800 (see FIGS. 6 and 35). As shown in FIG. 4, the inclination angle γ of the lower surface (inclined surface) of the lower cover 800 with respect to the horizontal plane is about 7 degrees. Further, the lower ends of the speakers 67L and 67R are arranged above a straight line T1 (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 4) extending along the lower cover 800. Accordingly, the rear lower end portion of the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 (specifically, the rear lower end portion 67X of the speakers 67L and 67R shown in FIG. 6, the specific portion) is located above the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55. Is formed.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 4, compared with the case where a horizontal horizontal plane is formed rearward from the lower end position P <b> 6 on the front side of the upper decorative portion 200, the glass plate 55 is provided for the game player. It becomes easy to visually recognize the rear of the upper portion 55a. In this embodiment, a straight line T1 (see a two-dot chain line in FIG. 4, an imaginary straight line) extending along the lower cover 800 from the lower end position P6 on the front side of the upper decorative portion 200 matches the upper end position P7 of the glass plate 55. It extends to do. As a result, as shown in FIG. 55, it is possible to visually recognize the rear portion of the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55, that is, the upper portion 7b of the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7.

  Since the lower cover 800 is formed so as to extend toward the upper end position P7 of the glass plate 55, when a player who is playing (sitting in a seat) looks obliquely upward, the upper decoration portion It is possible to turn the line of sight toward the rear of the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55 along the lower wall portion (mainly the lower cover 800) of 200 without a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, since the field of view gradually increases along the lower cover 800, it is possible to give a novel impression that the space surrounded by the pachinko gaming machine 1 gradually increases toward the rear.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lid member 240 is disposed as the upper wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200. Due to the upper lid member 240, the face portion of the face unit 403 (design portion, the form of the face of the main character of the pachinko gaming machine 1) cannot be visually recognized. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the front plate 241 of the upper lid member 240 is rotated so as to be bent with respect to the rear plate 242 (specific operation), whereby the face portion of the face unit 403 is obtained. A visual contact space SK that can be visually recognized and contacted can be formed. Accordingly, it is possible to remove dirt, dust, and the like attached to the face portion of the face unit 403 or to clean the inside of the upper decoration portion 200 in a state where the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position.

  In the upper lid member 240, only the front plate 241 disposed on the front side can be bent with respect to the rear plate 242. Therefore, it is easier for employees who go around the aisle of the game hall to form the visual contact space SK than when the rear plate 242 can be bent with respect to the front plate 241. For this reason, as described above, the inside of the face unit 403 and the upper decorative portion 200 can be easily cleaned.

  Here, suppose that not only the front plate 241 but also the rear plate 242 can be bent. However, in this case, it becomes easy for the player to bend the front plate 241 and the rear plate 242 by mischief and to look into the entire face unit 403. Furthermore, dust or the like is likely to be mixed inside the upper decorative portion 200. Therefore, in this embodiment, only the front plate 241 on the front side can be bent so that the entire face unit 403 is not seen as much as possible, and dust or the like is not easily mixed inside the upper decorative portion 200. It is possible.

  Further, a configuration in which the front plate 241 is fixed to the rear plate 242 is conceivable. That is, it is conceivable to configure the upper lid member 240 as a single plate. In this case, of course, the visual contact space SK cannot be formed as described above, and the face portion of the face unit 403 and the inside of the upper decorative portion 200 cannot be cleaned. Further, in this case, there is a possibility that the player may forcibly bend the upper lid member 240 configured as one plate in order to look into the face portion of the face unit 403. As a result, the upper lid member 240 is destroyed. Therefore, in this embodiment, only the front plate 241 of the upper lid member 240 can be bent. Thereby, it is possible to form the visual contact space SK, and to prevent the upper lid member 240 from being broken by mischief.

  As shown in FIG. 56, even if the front plate 241 is bent with respect to the rear plate 242, the front plate 241 is biased by the winding spring 244 (see FIG. 34A) so as not to be bent. That is, the visual contact space SK cannot be formed unless the front plate 241 is continuously bent against the urging force of the winding spring 244. Therefore, even if the player bends the front plate 241 by mischief, the upper lid member 240 can be naturally returned to the original state (see FIG. 1) if the player's hand is separated from the front plate 241. . That is, it is possible to avoid that the face unit 403 remains visible.

  Next, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, an operation when the frame movable body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1, 3, and 4, when the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position, the upper lid member 240 is disposed as the upper wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200. Further, a front cover 260 is disposed as a front wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200. Further, a lower cover 800 is disposed as a lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200. And since the frame movable body 400 is accommodated in the upper decoration part 200, the frame movable body 400 cannot be visually recognized. That is, the face portion of the face unit 403 cannot be seen. At this time, the frame movable body 400 has a length in the front-rear direction that is longer than either the length in the vertical direction or the length in the left-right direction (see FIG. 41A).

  When the rotary motor 311 provided in the link unit 302 is driven, the movable frame body 400 moves as shown in FIG. 41 (A) → FIG. 41 (B) → FIG. 42 (A). That is, the frame movable body 400 rotates around the rotation pin 332 so that the rear end (the top of the main character) moves forward and upward. At this time, the rotation pin 332 itself that rotatably supports the frame movable body 400 also rotates about the axis O1 so as to move forward. Therefore, the movable frame body 400 moves from the state shown in FIG. 42A toward the front (player side) while rotating so that the rear end portion rises as shown in FIG. 42B. As a result, it is possible to show the player the powerful movement of the movable frame 400 by the movable frame 400 that approaches while rotating.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (A) → FIG. 41 (B) → FIG. 42 (A), when the rotating pin 332 moves forward, the frame movable body 400 rotating around the rotating pin 332 is connected to the connecting plate. It is possible to stand up while avoiding interference with 301 or the tilted data display device 162. That is, if the rotating pin 332 does not move forward, the rear end of the frame movable body 400 that is long in the front-rear direction may interfere with the connecting plate 301 or the data display device 162. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the above-described interference by moving the rotation pin 332 forward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (A) → FIG. 41 (B) → FIG. 42 (A), when the movable frame body 400 moves, the upper lid member 240 moves forward as shown in FIG. 42 (A). And rotate (tilt) so as to be inclined obliquely upward. At this time, as shown in FIG. 44, the front cover 260 that is integrally attached to the front side of the movable frame body 400 rotates (tilts) so that the angle inclined with respect to the vertical direction becomes large. . Further, at this time, the lower cover 800 integrally attached to the lower side of the movable frame body 400 is rotated (tilted) so that the angle inclined with respect to the horizontal direction becomes large, as shown in FIG. )

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (B) → FIG. 43 (A) → FIG. 43 (B), the movable frame body 400 is moved by driving the rotary motor 311. That is, the frame movable body 400 rotates around the rotation pin 332 so that the rear end (the top of the main character) moves forward and upward. However, at this time, the rotation pin 332 that rotatably supports the frame movable body 400 rotates around the axis center O1 so as to move backward. Therefore, the frame movable body 400 first stands up in a substantially vertical direction while moving rearward from the state shown in FIG. 42 (B) as shown in FIG. 43 (A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43 (B) from the state shown in FIG. 43 (A), the movable frame body 400 is inclined slightly upward toward the front while moving slightly backward. As described above, the movable frame body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position.

  When the frame movable body 400 moves to the operating position, the output control of the pulse signal to the rotary motor 311 is normally executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 54B, the shielding projection 843 of the harness cover 840 is already blocking light from the light emitting portion of the movable space photosensor 309 provided on the connecting plate 301. That is, it is confirmed that the movable space KK is formed. Therefore, the movement of the ear member 540 to the protruding position is not restricted, and the linear motion motor 550 starts to be driven.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 48 (A) from the state shown in FIG. 47 (A), the heel plate 510 of the left ear movable body 500L and the heel plate 510 of the right ear movable body 500R are rotated together with the rotating pinions 551. It swings around each swinging shaft 610 so as to open left and right. As a result, the eaves member 520 attached to each eaves plate 510 moves so as to open left and right. Further, at this time, the ear member 540 of the left ear movable body 500L and the ear member 540 of the right ear movable body 500R tilt to the left and right with the contact portion TB as a fulcrum. Thus, each ear member 540 moves from the storage position to the retracted position.

  48A, the ear member 540 of the left ear movable body 500L and the ear member 540 of the right ear movable body 500R are moved linearly from the state shown in FIG. It moves straight along the rail 530. Thus, each ear member 540 moves to the protruding position. When each ear member 540 moves to the protruding position, the shielding portion 544 of each ear member 540 blocks light from the light emitting portion of the protruding photosensor 513 as shown in FIG. Thus, the protruding photosensor 513 detects that each ear member 540 is in the protruding position.

  Here, FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the frame movable body 400 is in the operating position and the ear member 540 is in the protruding position. 58 is a front view of FIG. 57, and FIG. 59 is a right side view of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, after the movable frame body 400 is moved to the operating position and the ear member 540 is moved to the protruding position, the jaw member 730 is tilted in the vertical direction in this embodiment.

  That is, first, the tilt motor 751 is rotationally driven in a predetermined positive direction. Thereby, the jaw member 730 tilts from the closed position shown in FIG. 51 (B) to the open position shown in FIG. 52 (A). Subsequently, the tilting motor 751 is driven to rotate in the opposite direction opposite to the above-described forward direction. Thereby, the jaw member 730 tilts from the open position shown in FIG. 52 (A) to the closed position shown in FIG. 51 (B). In this way, it is possible to show the player who is looking at the movable frame body 400 in the protruding position after the mouth of the movable frame body 400 is opened once.

  As described above, in the upper decorative portion 200 of the present embodiment, it is possible to show a novel movement by the four types of movable members (the frame movable body 400, each heel member 520, each ear member 540, and the jaw member 730). is there. That is, the movable frame body 400 first moves from the standby position to the operating position (see FIGS. 1 and 57). Subsequently, each flange member 520 moves so as to open to the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 47A and 48A). At this time, each ear member 540 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position via the retracted position (see FIGS. 47A, 48A, and 49A). Thereafter, the jaw member 730 moves from the closed position to the closed position again through the open position (see FIGS. 51B and 52A). Therefore, it is possible to give a very strong impact to the player by showing various movements in the upper part of the front frame 53.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, when the movable frame body 400 is in the operating position, it is located above the upper edge 50U of the gaming machine frame 50. However, the frame movable body 400 moves rearward from the front end position P1 of the upper decorative portion 200 by moving from the standby position to the operating position. This is based on the following reason. In this embodiment, in order to give a strong impact, a very large frame movable body 400 is provided in the upper decoration part 200. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper decorative portion 200 is largely projected forward, and a long movable frame body 400 is disposed on the upper decorative portion 200 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 41A). ).

  As described above, when the movable frame body 400 is moved from the standby position to the operating position, the rotary pin 332 is moved forward so that the movable frame body 400 does not interfere with the connecting plate 301 and the data display device 162. However, if the rotation pin 332 continues to move forward here, the movable frame body 400 in the operating position may be excessively forward. That is, when the movable frame body 400 is positioned further forward than the front end position P1 of the upper decorative portion 200 that protrudes greatly in advance, it is necessary for employees and players who circulate the aisle of the game hall to use the frame. The movable body 400 may get in the way.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41 (A) → FIG. 41 (B) → FIG. 42 (A), after the rotation pin 332 is moved forward, FIG. 42 (B) → FIG. As shown in FIG. 43B, the rotation pin 332 is moved backward. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 59, the movable frame body 400 in the operating position can be arranged behind the front end position P1 of the upper decorative portion 200. As a result, even if it is the large frame movable body 400, it can be avoided that it goes too far forward, and it can be avoided that it obstructs the passage of employees and players.

  In this embodiment, when the frame movable body 400 is at the standby position, the lower cover 800 forms the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 57 and 59, the lower cover 800 moves so as to incline obliquely upward toward the front behind the movable frame body 400 as the movable frame body 400 moves to the operating position. To do. As shown in FIG. 60, when the frame movable body 400 is in the operating position, the front cover 260 is disposed below the upper decorative portion 200 as will be described later. Thus, when the frame movable body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position, the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is greatly deformed (displaced) (see FIGS. 6 and 60). Therefore, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player who thought that the lower wall part of the upper decorative part 200 is a fixed object. That is, as shown in FIG. 60, for the player who is playing the game, the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 immediately above is greatly deformed, so that it is possible to give an impact that overturns the common sense as the upper decorative portion. is there.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position, as shown in FIG. 3, the front cover 260 forms the front wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200, and as shown in FIG. The lid member 240 forms the upper wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200. As the movable frame body 400 moves to the operating position, the front cover 260 moves so as to be inclined obliquely downward toward the front below the movable frame body 400 as shown in FIGS. As the movable frame body 400 moves to the operating position, the upper lid member 240 moves so as to incline obliquely upward toward the front behind the movable frame body 400 as shown in FIG. Thus, when the frame movable body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position, not only the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is greatly deformed (displaced) as described above, but also the front wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 The upper wall is also greatly deformed (displaced). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger impact by showing the deformation of most of the wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front cover 260 forms the left side wall portion and the front side portion of the right side wall portion of the upper decoration portion 200. Yes. When the movable frame body 400 is moved to the operating position, the front cover 260 moves as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 59, the left side wall portion and the front side portion of the right side wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 are moved. Is missing. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the deformation of almost all the wall portions of the upper decoration portion 200, that is, the front side wall portion and the upper, lower, left and right wall portions, and can give a very strong impact.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position, the lower cover 800 that forms the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is integrally attached to the lower side of the frame movable body 400 ( (See FIG. 37). A front cover 260 that forms the front wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is also integrally attached to the front side of the frame movable body 400 (see FIG. 37). In short, the movable frame member itself that moves relative to the upper decorative portion 200 forms the lower wall portion and the front wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200. Therefore, when the movable frame body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position, the movable frame body 400, the portion that formed the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 (lower cover 800), and the upper decorative portion 200. It is possible to show the player a novel movement in which the portion (front cover 260) that has formed the front wall portion of the front wall portion moves integrally.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 59, a movable frame movable body 400 is provided on the upper decorative portion 200, and a movable sword member 221 is also provided on the right decorative portion 220. . Therefore, the movable frame body 400 moves above the player, and the sword member moves to the right of the player. Therefore, the surprise that the frame movable member (the frame movable body 400, the sword member 221) moves in two places among the upper decorative portion 200, the left decorative portion 210, the right decorative portion 220, and the operation mechanism portion 230 of the front frame 53. Can be given to a person. That is, when viewed from the player's eyes, it is possible to show a novel movement in which the frame movable member moves in two directions, upward and rightward.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, when the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position and the sword member 221 is in the storage position, the upper decorative portion 200 protrudes more forward than the right decorative portion 220. . However, as shown in FIG. 59, when the frame movable body 400 is in the operating position and the sword member 221 is in the exposed position, the right decorative portion 220 protrudes more forward than the upper decorative portion 200. In this way, it is possible to give a surprise to a player who thinks that the upper decorative portion 200 protrudes most forward. That is, it is possible to make the player feel a novel gaming machine frame 50 by showing the player a large deformation (displacement) as the entire front frame 53.

  Here, in this embodiment, since the frame movable body 400 that is as large as possible is mounted, the movable body unit 201 (upper decorative portion 200) greatly protrudes forward and becomes very heavy as shown in FIGS. Yes. However, because of the large frame movable body 400, there is almost no space in the interior of the movable body unit 201. Moreover, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the weight is biased to the upper front side by the movable body unit 201 that largely protrudes forward. Accordingly, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a poor weight balance, and it is desired to reduce the weight of the movable body unit 201.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of drive sources mounted on the movable body unit 201 is reduced. That is, the ear member 540 uses the driving force of the linear motor 550 to move from the retracted position shown in FIG. 47A to the retracted position shown in FIG. Moving. Further, the ear member 540 moves in the direction in which the linear motion rail 530 extends from the retracted position shown in FIG. 48 (A) to the protruding position shown in FIG. 49 (A) using the driving force of the same linear motor 550. . Thus, the ear member 540 can be moved in two directions by one linear motion motor 550. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the weight of the movable body unit 201 (upper decorative portion 200) compared to the case where two drive sources are mounted on the movable body unit 201 in order to move the ear member 540 in two directions. . Furthermore, since the ear unit 402 (two-way moving mechanism) can be configured compactly, the ear unit 402 can be easily mounted inside the movable body unit 201 even in a situation where there is almost no space in the interior of the movable body unit 201. Is possible.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48A from the state shown in FIG. 47A, the saddle plate 510 and the saddle member 520 are moved around the swing shaft 610 by using the driving force of the direct acting motor 550. Swing. As described above, the meshing force between the pinion 551 and the rack 543 is released by the rotation of the pinion 551. This is because the eaves plate 510 to which the pinion 551 is attached via the linear motor 550 can swing. Thus, by using the driving force of the linear motor 550, the ear member 540 can be moved not only in two directions, but also the heel plate 510 and the heel member 520 (effect body) can be moved. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the weight of the movable body unit 201 as compared with the case where a drive source for moving the flange member 520 is mounted on the movable body unit 201. Furthermore, since the ear unit 402 can be made compact, the ear unit 402 can be easily mounted inside the movable body unit 201.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the link unit 302 (the left link unit 302L and the right link unit 302R) is provided with a hexagonal shaft portion 321a. As described above, the hexagonal shaft portion 321a extends outward in the left-right direction from the first gear 321 (see FIG. 40B), and the first gear 321 is rotated by rotating the hexagonal shaft portion 321a. Can be rotated. That is, if the hexagonal shaft portion 321a is rotated in a predetermined positive direction, the frame movable body 400 (movable member) is changed from FIG. 41 (A) → FIG. 41 (B) → FIG. 42 (A) → FIG. It is possible to move from the standby position to the operating position as shown in FIG. Further, if the hexagonal shaft portion 321a is rotated in the direction opposite to the above-described normal direction, the frame movable body 400 is changed from FIG. 43 (B) → FIG. 43 (A) → FIG. 42 (B) → FIG. 41 (B) ⇒As shown in FIG. 41 (A), it is possible to move from the operating position to the standby position.

  Therefore, it is possible for the game hall employee to move the movable frame body 400 from the standby position to the operating position by rotating the hexagonal shaft portion 321a using a hexagonal wrench before or after the opening of business hours. is there. Thus, even if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not turned on, it is possible to manually place the movable frame body 400 in the operating position (a state where the face unit 403 is exposed). FIG. 57). As a result, it is possible to remove dirt and dust adhering to the face unit 403 and to remove dust and the like mixed inside the upper decoration unit 200.

  And in this form, as shown in FIG. 36, the hexagonal shaft part 321a is provided in the position exposed so that it can be operated from the outside. That is, the hexagonal shaft portion 321a passes through the main body case 310 of the link unit 302 toward the outside. Therefore, it is easy to operate the hexagonal shaft portion 321a using a hexagon wrench. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to easily perform maintenance on the movable frame body 400 or the upper decoration part 200. The hexagonal shaft portion 321a is exposed to the outside, but is difficult to operate by manual operation.

  However, in this embodiment, with the movable body unit 201 attached to the front frame 53 (base frame 56) (see FIG. 1), the hexagonal shaft portion 321a exposed to the outside can be rotated using a hexagon wrench. Although there is a light emitter unit 202L, 202R, the operation to the hexagonal shaft portion 321a is not easy. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33, if the movable body unit 201 is removed from the front frame 53 (base frame 56), the operation to the hexagonal shaft portion 321a is simplified, and maintenance is performed on the movable frame body 400 or the upper decorative portion 200. Can be performed more easily.

  In this embodiment, the ear member 540 does not move even when the hexagonal shaft portion 321a is rotated. However, an operation means that can move the ear member 540 from the retracted position to the protruding position is provided. Anyway. Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the front plate 241 of the upper lid member 240 is opened, and the front end of the movable frame body 400 is manually pushed downward to operate the movable frame body 400 from the standby position. It can be moved manually to the position. However, it is preferable to rotate the hexagonal shaft portion 321a using a hexagonal wrench because an excessive load is unlikely to act on the gear mechanism 320.

  By the way, there are cases in which the same pachinko gaming machines are lined up in the left-right direction to form a gaming island. FIG. 61 shows a state in which the same pachinko gaming machine 1L as the present pachinko gaming machine 1 is arranged on the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in order to configure a gaming island. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper decorative part 200 protrudes greatly forward, and the distance L <b> 1 from the upper decorative part 200 to the outer frame 51 is from the operating mechanism part 230 to the outer frame 51. It is more than twice the distance L2. Furthermore, the right decorative part 220 protrudes greatly forward, and the distance L3 from the upper decorative part 200 to the outer frame 51 is more than twice the distance L2 from the operation mechanism part 230 to the outer frame 51.

  Therefore, for a player who is playing with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the upper decorative portion 200 on the upper side, the right decorative portion 220 on the right side, and the right decorative portion 220 of the pachinko gaming machine 1L on the left side. It feels like being surrounded by. That is, it is possible to wrap the player who plays a game while operating each operation means (the handle 60, the effect button 63, the select button 68) of the operation mechanism unit 230 with the upper and left decorative portions. As a result, it is possible to provide a space where the user can concentrate on the game.

  Here, the characteristics of the operation of the movable frame body 400 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As a precondition, when the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position, the length in the front-rear direction is larger than the length in the vertical direction or the length in the left-right direction. 62A and 62B are diagrams showing a case where the movable frame body 400 is moved from the standby position as a comparative example. As in the comparative example, when the movable frame body 400 is raised so that the front end portion 400X of the movable frame body 400 moves upward and backward, the movable frame body 400 stands while moving backward.

  In contrast, FIGS. 62C and 62D are diagrams illustrating a case where the movable frame body 400 is moved from the standby position as in the present embodiment. When the frame movable body 400 is raised so that the rear end portion 400Y of the frame movable body 400 moves upward and forward as in this embodiment, the frame movable body 400 stands up while moving forward. That is, while the frame movable body 400 moves forward, the length in the vertical direction becomes larger than either the length in the front-rear direction or the length in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to make the vertically long movable frame 400 appear closer to the player (see FIGS. 44 (A) and 44 (B)), and the more powerful movement of the movable frame 400 is shown than in the comparative example. It is possible.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, when the movable frame body 400 is moved (stands up) to the operating position, it is inclined obliquely upward toward the front without being raised in the vertical direction (vertical). It is in the state which did. This is to make it difficult for the movable frame body 400 to interfere with the data display device 162 tilting. Further, this is to make it easier for the player in the game to see the front of the face portion of the face unit 403.

3. Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relates to a main control board (game control board) 80 that performs control related to game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and effects to be executed as the game progresses. A sub-control board (production control board) 90 that performs control, a payout control board 110 that performs control related to payout of game balls, and the like are provided. The main control board 80 constitutes a main control part, and the sub control board 90 constitutes a sub control part together with an image control board 100, a sub drive board 107, and an audio control board 106 described later. The sub-control unit includes at least a sub-control board 90, and includes rendering means (first image display device 6, second image display device 7, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, movable frame body 400, etc.). It is only necessary that the used game effect can be controlled.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a power supply board 150. The power supply board 150 (power-on means) supplies power to the main control board 80, the sub-control board 90, and the payout control board 110, and supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. Supply. A backup power supply circuit 151 is provided on the power supply board 150. The backup power supply circuit 151 supplies power to the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 described later when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 is retained even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. A power switch 155 is connected to the power board 150. By turning on / off the power switch 155, turning on / off the power is switched. A backup power supply circuit for the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 may be provided on the main control board 80, or a backup power supply circuit for the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 may be provided on the sub control board 90.

  As shown in FIG. 63, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, a CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the ROM 83, and inputs and outputs data and signals. An I / O port section (input / output circuit) 87 is included. The ROM 83 may be externally attached.

  The RAM 84 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 85 (first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and second special figure reservation storage unit 85b). The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a includes four storage areas corresponding to the number of first special figure reservations that can be stored. The second special figure storage unit 85b includes four storage areas corresponding to the number of second special figure storages that can be stored. Each storage area is divided into four storage areas. These four storage areas are an area for storing a jackpot random number, which will be described later, an area for storing a hit type random number, an area for storing a reach random number, and an area for storing a variation pattern random number.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first start opening sensor 20a, a second start opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first big prize opening sensor 30a, a second big prize opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and a non-specification. An area sensor 70a and a normal winning opening sensor 27a are connected.

  The first start port sensor 20 a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball won in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has won the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is provided in the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball won in the first big prize opening 30. The second grand prize opening sensor 35 a is provided in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball won in the second big prize opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. The non-specific area sensor 70a is provided in the non-specific area 70 in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27 a is provided in each of the normal winning openings 27 and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, the electric chew solenoid 24, the first big prize opening solenoid 33, the second big prize opening solenoid 38, and the distribution member solenoid 73 are connected. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36. The distribution member solenoid 73 is for driving the distribution member 71 of the second big winning device 36.

  Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special diagram hold indicator 43a, a second special figure hold indicator 43b, A figure hold indicator 44 is connected. That is, display control of these display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 has a prize ball payout device 120, a ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, enabling ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. Are connected to each other, and a launching device 112 is connected via a launch control circuit 111. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

  The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 to win a prize ball. Or the ball rental motor 131 of the ball rental device 130 is driven to pay out the ball. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. In addition, the paid-out ball rental is detected by the ball rental sensor 132 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launch device 112, the touch switch 114 detects contact with the handle 60, and the launch volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a single game ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed.

  As shown in FIG. 64, an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “effect control microcomputer”) 91 for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, a CPU 92 that executes a program stored in the ROM 93, and a data and signal An I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 97 for performing input / output is included. The ROM 93 may be externally attached.

  As shown in FIG. 64, an image control board 100, an audio control board 106, and a sub drive board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls the display control of the first image display device 6 and the display control of the second image display device 7 to the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. To do. The RAM 104 of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM 103 of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data displayed on the first image display device 6 and the second image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, and the like ( Image data such as decorative images) and background images are stored. The CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The sub-control board 90 is connected to an effect button detection switch (SW) 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a detection signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. When the select button is pressed, a detection signal is output from the select button detection switch 68a to the sub-control board 90.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effect, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Further, in this case, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 through the sub drive board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 as shown in FIG. The lighting control of the face LED 741 is performed via the sub drive board 107, the frame movable body control board 306, the ear control board 660, and the face control board 740, which will be described later. More specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 uses light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, or lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, and the face LED 741. The light emission of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, and the face LED 741 is controlled according to the light emission pattern data. Note that data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control of the movable board drive motor 15 a connected to the sub drive board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data and return data) that determines the operation mode of the movable board 15 and controls the drive of the movable board drive motor 15a according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the motion pattern data includes data for determining an operation mode of the movable frame body 400 described later, data for determining an operation mode of the ear member 540, and data for determining an operation mode of the jaw member 730.

  Further, the movable frame control board 306 is connected to the sub drive board 107. A touch sensor 264 (see FIG. 38B) is connected to the frame movable body control board 306. Therefore, when a human body contacts the touch electrode 263, a detection signal is output from the touch sensor 264 to the sub control board 90 via the frame movable body control board 306 and the sub drive board 107. In addition, a standby photosensor 315 for detecting that the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position and a movable space photosensor 309 for detecting that the movable space KK has been formed are connected to the sub drive substrate 107. Has been. The detection signals of these photosensors 315 and 309 are output to the sub control board 90 via the frame movable body control board 306 and the sub drive board 107. In addition, a rotation motor 311 (see FIG. 39) for rotating the frame movable body 400 is connected to the frame movable body control board 306. Therefore, the sub drive board 107 performs drive control of the rotary motor 311 via the movable frame control board 306 based on the drive signal from the sub control board 90.

  The ear control board 660 is connected to the frame movable body control board 306. The ear control board 660 is connected to a linear motor 550 (see FIG. 46B) for linearly moving and swinging the ear member 540. Therefore, the sub drive board 107 performs drive control of the linear motor 550 via the frame movable body control board 306 and the ear control board 660 based on the drive signal from the sub control board 90. The ear control board 660 is connected to a storage photosensor 512 that detects that the ear member 540 is in the storage position, and a protrusion photosensor 513 that detects that the ear member 540 is in the protrusion position. Yes. The detection signals of these photosensors 512 and 513 are output to the sub control board 90 via the ear control board 660, the movable frame control board 306, and the sub drive board 107.

  Further, the face control board 740 is connected to the frame movable body control board 306 via the ear control board 660. A tilting motor 751 (see FIG. 50) for tilting the jaw member 730 is connected to the face control board 740. Therefore, the sub drive board 107 performs drive control of the tilt motor 751 via the movable frame control board 306, the ear control board 660, and the face control board 740 based on the drive signal from the sub control board 90. . Further, the face control board 740 is connected to the face LED 741 whose lighting is controlled as described above.

  Note that a CPU may be mounted on the sub drive board 107 and the movable frame control board 306, and in that case, the CPU may perform drive control of each motor and lighting control of each lamp. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the sub drive board 107 and the movable frame control board 306, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  Here, FIGS. 63 to 65 are functional block diagrams for explaining the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 only, and not only the substrates shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 are provided. Except for the main control board 80, any one of the plurality of substrates shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 may be configured as one substrate, or one substrate illustrated in FIGS. 63 to 65 may be configured as a plurality of substrates. good.

4). Description of jackpot etc. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are “hits” and “off” as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of “missing”, the “design symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When winning a jackpot, the winning prize opening (the first winning prize opening 30 and the second winning prize opening 35) is opened with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (the type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot game is a multi-round game (unit open game), an opening before the first round game is started (also referred to as OP), and an ending after the last round game is completed (Also expressed as ED). Each round game starts with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The jackpot type is as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 66, in this embodiment, there are roughly two types of jackpots (V long jackpot and V short jackpot). The “V long jackpot” is a jackpot for operating the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 in a first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that allows a game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. The “V short jackpot” is a jackpot for operating the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 in a second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which a game ball cannot pass to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game.

  More specifically, “V long jackpot” has a total number of rounds of 16R (see FIG. 66). From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first grand prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second grand prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. In these 14R and 16R, passage to the specific area 39 in the second big prize opening 35 is easily possible.

  On the other hand, “V short jackpot” has a total number of rounds of 16R but a substantial total number of rounds of 13R (see FIG. 66). In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R and Even at 16R, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R. Therefore, in this V short jackpot, from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which a prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the V short jackpot is a substantial jackpot of 13R.

  In addition, in 14R and 16R in the V short jackpot, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened, but the opening time is extremely short, and it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 in the second big prize opening 35. It is possible. In 14R and 16R in the V short jackpot, not only the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 is short, but also the opening timing of the second big prize opening 35 and the operation timing of the distribution member 71 (second state ( From the relationship with the first state (see FIG. 29 (B)) to the first state (see FIG. 29 (A)), it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the passing of the game ball to the specific area 39 in the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is shifted to a high probability state to be described later. Therefore, when the above-mentioned V long jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot game can be shifted to the high probability state by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the V short jackpot is won, the game ball cannot be passed to the specific area 39 while the jackpot game is being executed. Therefore, the game state after the jackpot game is a normal probability state described later. (Non-high probability state).

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1), the jackpot distribution rate is 50% for the V long jackpot and 50% for the V short jackpot. On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special chart 2) are all V long jackpots. In other words, when a big win is won by a lottery based on a winning to the second starting port 21 that can be entered by executing electric support control, which will be described later, the V long jackpot is always made. Thus, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball is won at the second start port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (the lottery of the first special symbol) performed by winning the game ball at the first start port 20. The jackpot lottery (the second special symbol lottery) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

  Here, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the lottery for determining whether or not the jackpot is won is performed based on the “big hit random number”, and the lottery for the type of winning jackpot is performed based on the “big hit type random number”. As shown in FIG. 67 (A), the jackpot random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The jackpot type random number takes a value in the range of 0-9. In addition to the jackpot random number and the jackpot type random number, the random numbers acquired based on the winning at the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 include “reach random number” and “variation pattern random number”.

  The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not a reach is generated in the effect design variation effect indicating the result when the result of the jackpot determination is out of place. Reach is a state where there is only one effect symbol that is variably displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and depending on which symbol the effect symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of “7 ↓ 7”) that is a combination of effect symbols indicating a big win. It should be noted that the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if they are slightly shaken in the display screen 7a. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0-127.

  The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern including a variation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. In addition, the random number acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 includes a normal symbol random number (per hit random number) shown in FIG. 67 (B). The normal symbol random number is a random number for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Normal design random numbers take values in the range of 0-255.

5. Description of the gaming state Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol display 42 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 each have a probability variation function and a variation time shortening function. A state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol display 41 is activated is referred to as a “high probability state”, and a state in which it is not activated is referred to as a “normal probability state (non-high probability state)”. In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal probability state. That is, the jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination table in which the value of the jackpot random number determined to be a jackpot is larger than the jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (see FIG. 68A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol display 41 is activated, the probability that the display result of the special symbol variable display by the special symbol display 41 (that is, the stop symbol) becomes a jackpot symbol compared to when the special symbol display 41 is not activated. Becomes higher.

  In addition, a state in which the function for reducing the variation time of the special symbol display 41 is in operation is referred to as “time-short state”, and a state in which the special symbol display 41 is not in operation is referred to as “non-time-short state”. In the short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed) is shorter than in the non-short-time state. That is, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more than in the non-time-short state (see FIG. 69). That is, when the function for shortening the variation time of the special symbol display device 41 is activated, it is easy to select a short variation time as the variation time of the variable symbol special display, compared to when the special symbol display 41 is not activated. As a result, in the short-time state, the special-patch holding pace is accelerated, and an effective winning (a winning that can be stored as a special-pending hold) at the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game.

  The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 may be activated at the same time, or only one of them may be activated. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 operate in synchronization with the variation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 operate in the time-short state and do not operate in the non-time-short state. Therefore, in the short time state, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the non-short time state. In other words, a hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed using a normal symbol per-decision table having more normal symbol random numbers (per hit random) determined to be hit than a normal symbol per-decision table used in a non-time-saving state ( FIG. 68 (C)). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the display result of the variable symbol normal display by the normal symbol display 42 becomes the normal winning symbol is higher than when the normal symbol display 42 is not activated. .

  In the short time state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-short time state. In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-short-time state, but is 1 second in the short-time state (see FIG. 68D). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state (see FIG. 70). That is, the open time extension function of the electric chew 22 is activated. In addition, in the short time state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than that in the non-short time state (see FIG. 70). That is, the function of increasing the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened is activated.

  In the situation where the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 and the open time extension function and the number of times of opening increase function of the electric chew 22 are activated, compared to the case where these functions are not activated. Thus, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, and game balls frequently win the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these functions are activated is referred to as a “high base state”, and a state in which these functions are not activated is referred to as a “low base state”. In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control to support winning at the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is executed.

  In the high base state (electric support control state), not all the functions described above may operate. That is, the operation of one or more of the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increasing function of the electric chew 22 Therefore, it is only necessary that the electric chew 22 be opened more easily than when the function is not activated. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time-short state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V long jackpot is a high probability state, a short time state, and a high base if the game is passed to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. State. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate base state”. The high-accuracy base state is terminated when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (160 times in this embodiment), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

  In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V short jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e., if the specific area 39 is not passed during the jackpot game). A low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low-accuracy base state”. The low-accuracy base state ends when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-short state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low probability low base state”. The low probability low base state may be referred to as a “normal game state”. A state in which a special game (a jackpot game) is being executed is referred to as a “special game state (a jackpot game state)”. Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a “specific game state”.

  In a high base state such as a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the game ball is advanced to the right game area 3B by hitting right. This is because the electric support 22 makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. . Therefore, the player makes a right turn to win the game ball at the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of start prizes (win prizes at the start opening) rather than left-handed. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a right-handed game is played even during a big hit game.

  On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A (see FIG. 27) by left-handed. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start port 20 than to win the second start port 21. Because it is. Therefore, a left turn is made to win a game ball in the first starting port 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of start prizes than right-handed.

6). Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 71, and the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described.

  [Main-side timer interrupt processing] The game control microcomputer 81 repeats the main-side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 71 every short time, for example, 4 msec. First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is a jackpot random number used in the jackpot lottery, a jackpot type random number for determining the jackpot type, a reach random number for determining whether or not to reach the reach state in the variation effect, and a variation for determining the variation pattern. Random number update processing is performed to update pattern random numbers, normal symbol random numbers (per random numbers) used for normal symbol lottery (S101). Note that at least a part of each random number may be a hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like. The random number generation circuit may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (S102). In the input process (S102), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, first big prize port sensor 30a, second big prize port sensor 35a, which are mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The detection signal detected by the normal winning hole sensor 27a (see FIG. 63) is read, and payout data for paying out a winning ball corresponding to the type of the winning hole is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a start port sensor detection process (S103), a special operation process (S104), and a normal operation process (S105). In the start port sensor detection process (S103), if the first start port sensor 20a is ON, various random numbers such as a big hit random number (a big hit random number, a big hit) on condition that the number of reserved first figure reservations is less than four. A design random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number (see FIG. 67A)) are acquired. If the second start port sensor 21a is ON, various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers are acquired on condition that the number of second special figure reservations is less than four. If the gate sensor 28a is ON, a normal symbol random number (see FIG. 67 (B)) is acquired on condition that there are less than four ordinary figure storages.

  In the special operation process (S104), the random number such as the jackpot random number acquired in the start port sensor detection process (S103) is determined, and a special symbol is displayed to display the determination result (variation display and stop display). . When displaying the special symbol, a variation start command including variation pattern information is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation stop command is set at the output buffer of the RAM 84 at the start of the special symbol stop display. Set to. Note that the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69 based on determination of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers. As a result of the determination of the jackpot random number, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game for opening the first jackpot 30 or the second jackpot 35 according to a predetermined opening pattern (opening time or number of times of opening) ( Play a special game. Here, as shown in FIG. 69, when the variation pattern is determined, the variation time during which the variation display of the special symbol is executed is also determined. The SP reach (super reach) shown in the remarks column of FIG. 69 is a reach that has a longer variation time after reach than normal reach. The table allocation ratio is set so that the SP reach is higher in the winning expectation degree (expectation for the big hit win) than in the normal reach. In this embodiment, the super reach is executed through normal reach.

  In the normal operation process (S105), the normal symbol random number acquired in the start port sensor detection process is determined, and the normal symbol display (variation display and stop display) for notifying the determination result is performed. As a result of the normal symbol random number determination, if the normal symbol is won, an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 22 according to a predetermined opening pattern (opening time and number of times of opening, see FIG. 70) according to the gaming state Do.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an output process for outputting the command set in each process described above to the sub-control board 90 or the like (S106). In parallel with the processing in the game control microcomputer 81 described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the processes shown in FIGS. The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described below.

  [Sub-side 1 ms timer interrupt process] The effect control microcomputer 91 repeats the sub-side 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 72 every short time such as 1 msec. The effect control microcomputer 91 executes sub-side 1 ms timer interrupt processing and also executes sub-side 10 ms timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 75) as will be described later. As shown in FIG. 72, in the sub-side 1 ms timer interrupt process, first, an input process is performed (S201). In the input process (S201), switch data (edge data and level data) is created based on detection signals from the effect button detection switch 63a and the select button detection switch 68a (see FIG. 64).

  Subsequently, lamp data output processing is performed (S202). In the lamp data output process (S202), the lamp data created in the other process (S405) in the sub-side 10 ms timer interrupt process to be described later in order to cause the panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, and the face LED 741 to emit light at a timing suitable for the production. Is output to the sub drive substrate 107. That is, the panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, and the face LED 741 are caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the lamp data.

  Next, drive control processing described later is performed (S203). The drive control process (S203) is a process for controlling the drive of the movable frame body 400, the ear member 540, the jaw member 730, and the movable board body 15 (see FIG. 27). Then, the watchdog timer process (S204) for resetting the watchdog timer is performed, and this process is finished.

  [Drive Control Process] As shown in FIG. 73, in the drive control process (S203), it is first determined whether or not the frame movable body drive data is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 94 (S301). The movable frame body drive data is obtained by moving the movable frame body 400 from the standby position to the operating position, then moving the ear member 540 from the retracted position to the protruding position, and then tilting the jaw member 730. Operation pattern data. In this embodiment, the frame movable body drive data is set at a predetermined timing in the changing effect for executing the SP reach. If the frame movable body drive data is not set (NO in S301), the process proceeds to step S311 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if the frame movable body drive data is set (YES in S301), it is subsequently determined whether or not the standby photo sensor 315 is ON (S302). That is, it is determined whether or not the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position. If the standby photo sensor 315 is ON (YES in S302), a rotary motor drive process is performed (S303). In the rotation motor drive processing (S303), drive control of the rotation motor 311 is performed to move the frame movable body 400 from the standby position to the operation position based on the frame movable body drive data. Specifically, pulse signal output control is started for the rotary motor 311 which is a stepping motor. On the other hand, if the standby photo sensor is not ON (NO in S302), the rotary motor drive process (S303) is passed and the process proceeds to step S304.

  In step S304, it is determined whether or not the output control of the pulse signal to the rotary motor 311 is completed. If completed (YES in S304), it is then determined whether or not the movable space photosensor 309 is ON (S305). That is, it is determined whether or not the movable space KK is reliably formed. If the movable space photosensor 309 is ON (YES in S305), a linear motor driving process is performed (S306). In the direct drive motor drive process (S306), based on the frame movable body drive data, drive control of the direct drive motor 550 (second drive source) to move the ear member 540 from the retracted position to the protruding position through the retracted position. I do. Specifically, pulse signal output control is started for the linear motor 550 which is a stepping motor. On the other hand, if the output control of the pulse signal to the rotary motor 311 is not completed (NO in S304) or the movable space photosensor is not ON (NO in S305), the direct drive motor driving process (S306). ) And the process proceeds to step S307.

  In this manner, in this embodiment, in order to move the movable frame body 400 to the operating position, pulse signal output control (management of the number of steps) is performed on the rotary motor 311, but the movable space KK is further formed. I have confirmed. Even if the output control of the pulse signal to the rotary motor 311 is completed (YES in S304), if it is not detected that the movable space KK is formed (NO in S305), the linear motor driving process is performed. (S306) is not executed. Therefore, although the movable space KK is not formed, the ear member 540 in the storage position starts to move to the protruding position, and it is possible to reliably prevent the movable body unit 201 (upper decorative portion 200) from being damaged. It is possible.

  In step S307, it is determined whether or not the protruding photo sensor 513 is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the ear member 540 is in the protruding position. If it is ON (YES in S307), tilt motor drive processing is performed (S308). In the tilt motor drive process (S308), the drive control of the tilt motor 751 is performed so that the jaw member 730 is moved from the closed position to the open position and then moved from the open position to the closed position based on the frame movable body drive data. Do. Specifically, pulse signal output control is performed on a tilting motor 751 that is a stepping motor. On the other hand, if the projecting photosensor 513 is not ON (NO in S307), the tilt motor driving process (S308) is passed, and the process proceeds to step S309.

  In step S309, it is determined whether or not the jaw member 730 has moved from the open position to the closed position after moving from the closed position to the open position. If the movement to the closed position has been completed (YES in S309), the movable frame body drive data set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 94 is cleared (S310). On the other hand, if it has not moved to the closed position (NO in S309), the process proceeds to step S311 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in step S311, it is determined whether or not the frame movable body return data is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 94. The frame movable body return data is operation pattern data for moving the ear member 540 from the protruding position to the retracted position through the retracted position and then moving the frame movable body 400 from the operating position to the retracted position. In this embodiment, the frame movable body return data is set at a predetermined timing after the frame movable body drive data is set, for example. If the frame movable body return data is not set (NO in S311), the process proceeds to step S319.

  On the other hand, if the frame movable body return data is set (YES in S311), it is subsequently determined whether or not the protruding photosensor 513 is ON (S312). If the projecting photosensor 513 is ON (YES in S312), direct drive motor reverse drive processing is performed (S313). In the direct drive motor reverse drive process (S313), based on the frame movable body return data, drive control of the direct drive motor 550 is performed to move the ear member 540 from the protruding position to the retracted position through the retracted position. On the other hand, if the projecting photosensor 513 is not ON (NO in S312), the linear motion motor reverse drive process (S313) is passed and the process proceeds to step S314.

  In step S314, it is determined whether or not the storage photosensor 512 is ON. If it is ON (YES in S314), the rotary motor reverse drive process is performed (S315). In the rotation motor reverse drive process (S315), drive control of the rotation motor 311 is performed to move the frame movable body 400 from the operating position to the standby position based on the frame movable body return data. On the other hand, if the storage photosensor is not ON (NO in S314), the rotary motor reverse drive process (S315) is passed, and the process proceeds to step S316.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the movable frame body 400 is driven (returned) from the operating position to the standby position, it is confirmed that the ear member 540 has been reliably moved to the storage position. If it is not detected that the ear member 540 is in the storage position, the rotary motor reverse drive process (S315) is not executed. Therefore, although the ear member 540 is not in the storage position, it is possible to reliably prevent the movable frame unit 400 (upper decorative portion 200) from being damaged because the movable frame body 400 starts to move to the standby position. It is.

  In step S316, it is determined whether the standby photo sensor 315 is ON. If ON (YES in S316), the frame movable body return data set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 94 is cleared (S317). On the other hand, if standby photo sensor 315 is not ON (NO in S316), the process proceeds to step S318.

  In step S318, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 264 is ON. If it is ON (YES in S318), the movable frame stopping process is executed (S319). In the frame movable body stop process (S319), the movement of the frame movable body 400, the ear member 540, and the jaw member 730 is stopped. That is, the drive of the rotary motor 311, the drive of the linear motion motor 550, and the drive of the tilt motor 751 are stopped. Therefore, if any of these movable members (frame movable body 400, ear member 540, jaw member 730) is moving, the movable member can be stopped. Further, even when any movable member starts to move, it is possible to prevent the movable member from starting to move.

  Thereafter, as other processing (S320), for example, to control the movable board drive motor 15a in order to drive the movable board 15 at a timing suitable for production, the present process is finished.

  [Sub-side 10 ms timer interrupt process] The effect control microcomputer 91 repeats the sub-side 10 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 every 10 msec. As shown in FIG. 75, in the sub-side 10 ms timer interrupt process, first, a received command analysis process described later is performed (S401). Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed in which the switch data created in the sub-side 1 ms timer interrupt processing is stored in the RAM 94 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S402). Subsequently, based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process, a switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6 and the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7 is performed (S403). ).

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs voice control processing (S404). In the sound control process (S404), sound data (data for outputting sound from the speaker 67), sound data output to the sound control board 106, time management of sound effects, and the like are performed. Thereby, the sound suitable for the effect to be executed is output from the speaker 67.

  Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, and the face LED 741), updates various effect determination random numbers, and the like. The process is executed (S405), and this process ends.

  [Reception Command Analysis Processing] As shown in FIG. 76, in the reception command analysis processing (S401), the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S501). If it has been received, a variation effect start process described later is performed (S502).

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S503), and if received, performs a variation effect end process (S504). In the variation effect end process (S504), the variation stop command is analyzed, and a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 based on the analysis result.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command indicating the start of execution of the jackpot game opening is received from the main control board 80 (S505), and if received, performs opening effect selection processing (S505). S506). In the opening effect selection process (S506), the opening command is analyzed, and the pattern (contents) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, an opening effect start command for starting the opening effect with the selected opening effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command indicating the start of the execution of the big hit game is received from the main control board 80 (S507). Perform (S508). In the round effect selection process (S508), the round designation command is analyzed, and the pattern (content) of the round effect to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect with the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command indicating start of execution of the jackpot game ending has been received from the main control board 80 (S509), and if received, performs an ending effect selection process (S509). S510). In the ending effect selection process (S510), an ending command is analyzed, and an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the jackpot game ending is selected based on the analysis result. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect with the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

  In step S511, as other processing, processing based on a received command other than the above-described command (for example, processing for performing V passage notification based on a V passage command indicating passage to the specific area 39) is performed. Then, the received command analysis process (S401) is finished.

  [Variation Effect Start Process] As shown in FIG. 77, in the change effect start process (S502), the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes a change start command (S601). The fluctuation start command includes information on fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 69) and information on special figure stop symbol data based on jackpot determination. Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are finally stopped and displayed in the change effect (S602). Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects a change effect pattern that is the content of the change effect based on the analysis result of the change start command (S603). Once the variation production pattern is determined, the variation production time, the variation display mode of the production symbol, the presence / absence of the reach production, the contents of the reach production, the presence / absence of the SW production (production button production), the contents of the SW production, the production deployment configuration, the production design The details of the contents of the fluctuating effect, such as the type of background, are determined.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects a notice effect (S604). Thereby, the contents of the notice effects such as so-called step-up notice effects and chance-up notice effects are determined. Then, it is determined whether or not SP reach is executed in the variation effect to be executed (S605). Specifically, whether or not the variation pattern information included in the analyzed variation start command is variation patterns Q1, Q2, Q3, Q11, Q12, Q13, Q21, Q22, Q31, and Q32 (see FIG. 69). Determine. If the SP reach is to be executed (YES in S605), the frame movable body data setting process is executed (S606).

  In the frame movable body data setting process (S606), a setting process for setting the frame movable body drive data in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 94 at a predetermined timing during execution of SP reach is performed. Further, after the frame movable body drive data is set, a setting process for setting the frame movable body return data in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 94 is performed at a predetermined timing. Thus, at the predetermined timing during the execution of the SP reach, as described in the drive control process (S203), the movable frame body 400 is moved from the standby position to the operating position, and then the ear member 540 is retracted from the storage position. It is possible to move the jaw member 730 through the position to the protruding position and then move it. Further, at a predetermined timing thereafter, the ear member 540 can be moved from the protruding position to the retracted position via the retracted position, and then the movable frame body 400 can be moved from the operating position to the standby position.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91, the selected effect design, the change effect pattern, and the change effect start command for starting the change effect with the notice effect are set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S607), and the change effect start process ( S502) is terminated. When the variable effect start command set in step S607 is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6. And a variation effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7.

7). Advantages of the present embodiment As described in detail above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the front lower end portion (lower cover) located on the front side among the lower ends of the upper decorative portion 200 The lower end portion of the front end 800 is positioned below the upper portion 55 a of the glass plate 55. On the other hand, the rear lower end portion (the rear lower end portion 67X of the speakers 67L and 67R) located on the rear side of the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is positioned above the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the rear of the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the distance L1 from the front end position P1 of the upper decorative portion 200 to the front surface position P2 of the outer frame 51 (curtain plate 51a) is the operation mechanism portion 230. Is at least twice the distance L2 from the front end position P3 to the front position P2 of the outer frame 51. Therefore, the upper side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 protrudes greatly forward, and the upper decorative portion 200 is likely to hang down. Therefore, as described above, even if the front lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is below the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55, the rear lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is more than the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55. Further, it is possible to ensure the visibility behind the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower surface of the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is inclined to extend obliquely upward toward the rear by the lower cover 800. . A straight line T <b> 1 extending along the lower cover 800 from the lower end position P <b> 6 on the front side of the upper decorative portion 200 is made to coincide with the upper end position P <b> 7 of the glass plate 55. That is, the lower cover 800 is arranged to extend toward the upper end position P7 of the glass plate 55. Thereby, when the player looks obliquely upward, as shown in FIG. 55, the player feels that the field of view gradually widens along the lower cover 800, and the rear of the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55 without any sense of incongruity. Can be visually recognized.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second image display device 7 is arranged above the first image display device 6 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, the upper part 7 b of the display screen 7 a of the second image display device 7 is arranged above the game area 3 and is arranged behind the upper part 55 a of the glass plate 55. Therefore, as described above, the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7 above the gaming area 3 is formed by setting the rear lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 above the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55. It is possible to visually recognize the upper part 7b. Therefore, the player can view the display screen in a wider range.

8). Modified Examples Hereinafter, modified examples will be described. In the description of the modified example, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted. Of course, you may comprise combining the structure which concerns on a modification suitably. Further, technical features in the above-described embodiments and the following modifications can be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in the present specification.

<First Modification>
Based on FIG. 78, the 1st modification of the said form is demonstrated. In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the hexagonal shaft portion 321a exposed to the outside is provided so that employees of the game hall (hall) can easily operate the hexagonal shaft portion 321a. However, there is a possibility that the player operates the hexagonal shaft portion 321a with mischief. Therefore, in the first modified example, as shown in FIG. 78, the hexagonal shaft portion 321b is provided so that the player cannot operate it.

  In the first modification, a pair of left and right through holes 56 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the upper portion of the rear surface of the base frame 56 of the front frame 53. Each hexagonal shaft portion 321b is inserted through each through hole 56a. These hexagonal shaft portions 321b (operation means) are connected to a gear mechanism (not shown), and the gear mechanism is connected to the first gear 321 (see FIG. 40B) described above. Therefore, the first gear 321 can be rotated via the gear mechanism by rotating the hexagonal shaft portion 321b. That is, by rotating the hexagonal shaft portion 321b, the movable frame body 400 in the standby position can be moved to the operating position, and the movable frame body 400 in the operating position can be moved to the standby position. It is.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first modified example, when an employee of the game hall performs maintenance on the movable frame body 400 or the upper decoration part 200, as shown in FIG. 78, the front frame 53 (second frame) Member) is opened with respect to the inner frame 52 (first frame member) and the outer frame 51. Thereby, each hexagonal shaft part 321b arranged on the rear surface side of the base frame 56 of the front frame 53 can be rotated using a hexagon wrench. On the other hand, the player cannot open the front frame 53 with respect to the inner frame 52 and the outer frame 51. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the hexagonal shaft portions 321b by mischief or the like to move the movable frame body 400 from the standby position to the operating position.

<Second Modification>
Next, a second modification of the above embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine of the second modification is a slot machine (rotating-type gaming machine, pachislot gaming machine). As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the slot machine 900 includes a housing 910 whose front surface is open, and a front door 920 (corresponding to a front frame portion) rotatably attached to a side end of the housing 910. It has. Note that the upper, lower, left and right wall portions 910a of the housing 910 correspond to a frame-shaped base frame portion. In the second modification, a gaming machine frame is configured by the casing 910 and the front door 920.

  Inside the housing 910, reels 930L, 930C, and 930R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel 930L, a middle reel 930C, and a right reel 930R) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are juxtaposed in the left-right direction. Yes. A drive motor (not shown) that drives each reel 930 and a position detector (not shown) that detects the rotation position and stop position of each reel 930 are attached to each reel 930. Note that the reels 930L, 930C, and 930R constitute a symbol display unit.

  The front panel 921 disposed at the approximate center of the front door 920 in the vertical direction is provided with a reel window 922 formed of a transparent resin panel. The reel window portion 922 has a plurality of consecutive symbols (3 reels in this embodiment) among a plurality of types of symbols (21 reels in the embodiment) drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 930. Visible from.

  Here, the slot machine 900 wins the winning combination, and the symbol drawn on the left reel 930L, the symbol drawn on the middle reel 930C, and the symbol drawn on the right reel 930R are activated prizes. When a predetermined combination of symbols is arranged along the lines N1 to N5 (hereinafter also referred to as “winning”), a bonus (game medium (medal in this embodiment)) set for the winning winning combination is selected. Etc.) to the player. The winning combination includes, for example, a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”, which is an example of a jackpot) that allows a large amount of game media to be acquired, and a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB” that can acquire a larger amount of game media than the regular bonus). BB ", which is an example of a jackpot), a small role to which a small amount of game media is given, and a replay that allows the next game without newly setting the number of game media bets.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is derived and displayed on the winning lines N1 to N5 as the display result of each reel 930L, 930C, 930R, the gaming state corresponding to the combination of the symbols It is supposed to move to. For example, when a regular bonus or a big bonus is won, the game shifts to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

  As shown in FIG. 79, a medal insertion portion 940 capable of inserting medals is provided below the reel window 922 of the front door 920. Further, it is operated when a predetermined maximum bet number (in this embodiment, “3”) is set within the range using credits (storage of the number of medals owned by the player stored in the slot machine 900). A MAXBET switch 942, a start switch (start lever) 943 operated when starting the game, and stop switches (stop buttons) 944L, 944C, 944R operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 930L, 930C, 930R It is provided so that it can be operated by a player.

  Above the medal insertion unit 940, a credit display unit 941 configured with a multi-digit 7-segment LED display is provided. The credit display unit 941 displays the number of medals counted as credits.

  A decorative panel 946 for decorating the slot machine 900 is provided below the stop switch 944 and the like on the front door 920. Further, at the lowermost part of the front door 920, a medal payout exit 950 from which medals are paid out, a medal tray 952 that receives medals paid out from the medal payout exit 950, and a sound are output as the game progresses. A speaker 960 is provided.

  Further, an upper decorative portion 200 similar to the above-described embodiment is provided on the front door 920 at the upper portion of the front panel 921. That is, a movable body unit 201 having a movable frame body 400 is disposed at the center of the front panel 921 in the left-right direction, and light emitter units 202L and 202R are disposed on the left and right sides of the upper portion of the front panel 921. Is arranged. In addition, a right decorative portion 220 similar to the above-described embodiment is provided on the right portion of the front panel 921 in the front door 920. That is, a sword member 221 imitating the shape of a sword and a sheath member 222 imitating the shape of a sheath are arranged on the right portion of the front panel 921.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 900 of the second modified example, as shown in FIG. 80, the upper decorative portion 200 protrudes greatly forward from the front edge 952a of the medal tray 952 and the right decorative portion 220 also has the medal. The tray 952 largely protrudes forward from the front edge 952a. Then, as a result of lottery of the winning combination by the main control unit (not shown), when a winning combination (for example, big bonus) having a particularly large bonus among various winning combinations is won, the main control unit (game control unit) The frame movable body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position as described above by the sub-control unit (effect control unit) that receives the signal (FIGS. 41A, 41B, 42A, 42B, (See FIGS. 43A and 43B). Therefore, in the 2nd modification, it is possible to show the same operation effect as pachinko machine 1 explained by the above-mentioned form.

  In the second embodiment, a slot machine is described as an example of a so-called normal machine that increases award medals by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus. However, a special game period such as ART or AT that can be frequently won for small roles. It may be a so-called ART machine or AT machine that increases the number of acquired medals. In this case, the state during ART or AT is referred to as a special game state.

<Third Modification>
Next, a third modification of the above embodiment will be described based on FIG. In the said form, the lower end part (mainly lower cover 800) of the upper decoration part 200 extended diagonally upward toward back so that the back of the upper part 55a of the glass plate 55 could be visually recognized. Thus, the rear lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 (the rear lower end portion 67X of the speakers 67L and 67R, the specific portion) is positioned above the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55.

  On the other hand, in the third modified example, as shown in FIG. 81, the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is divided into a front portion 200A on the front side and a rear portion 200B on the rear side. The lower portion of the front portion 200A is a horizontal plane. However, the lower end position of the front portion 200 </ b> A is lower than the upper portion 55 a of the glass plate 55. On the other hand, the lower portion of the rear portion 200B (specific portion) is a horizontal plane. However, the lower end position of the rear portion 200B is higher than the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55, and is the same as the height of the upper end position P7 of the glass plate 55. That is, the straight line T <b> 2 extending rearward along the lower horizontal surface of the rear portion 200 </ b> B extends so as to coincide with the upper end position P <b> 7 of the glass plate 55.

  As described above, according to the third modification, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the upper portion of the glass plate 55 is caused by the front portion 200A of the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200. The back of 55a is hardly visible. However, a player who is playing a game (sitting in a seat) has a rear portion 200B formed so as to be recessed upward, and the rear portion of the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55 (that is, the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7). It is possible to visually recognize the upper part 7b). Thus, it is possible to give a strong surprise to the player who is seated at the start of the game by seeing the upper side of the game area 3 through the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55.

<Fourth Modification>
Next, based on FIG. 82, the 4th modification of the said form is demonstrated. In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame 51, the inner frame side mounting member 46c that rotates is first of all the front end of the inner raised portion 46f. It abuts on the portion 46f1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12C, the inner frame side mounting member 46c comes into contact with the front end portion 46g1 of the outer raised portion 46g.

  On the other hand, in the fourth modified example, as shown in FIG. 82, when the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame 51, the inner frame side mounting member 46c that rotates is the front end of the inner raised portion 46p. At the same time as it starts to contact the portion 46p1, it also starts to contact the front end portion 46q1 of the outer raised portion 46q. That is, the front end portion 46p1 of the inner raised portion 46p and the front end portion 46q1 of the outer raised portion 46q are arranged so as to simultaneously come into contact with the inner frame side mounting member 46c, respectively.

  As described above, according to the fourth modification, when the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame 51, the rotating inner frame side mounting member 46c rides on the front end portion 46p1 of the inner raised portion 46p. At the same time, it rides on the front end portion 46q1 of the outer raised portion 46q. Therefore, the inner frame side mounting member 46c can be ridden on the raised portions (the inner raised portion 46p and the outer raised portion 46q) in a stable state, and the closing operation of the inner frame 52 can be made smoother. It is.

<Fifth Modification>
Next, a fifth modification of the above embodiment will be described based on FIG. In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, when the fall prevention mechanism 95 is used, the first plate 96 is grounded longer in the front-rear direction than the left-right direction, and the second plate 97 is grounded longer in the left-right direction than the front-rear direction. It was like that. On the other hand, in the fifth modification, as shown in FIG. 83, the first shaft member 96X is grounded by the same length in the front-rear and left-right directions when the fall prevention mechanism 95X (grounding means) is used, and the second shaft member 97X is also grounded for the same length in the front, rear, left, and right.

  In the fifth modification, the first shaft member 96X is assembled to be rotatable around a first shaft pin 98X extending in the front-rear direction. The first shaft member 96X extends in the left-right direction when the fall prevention mechanism 95X is not in use, and is not visible from the front. On the other hand, when the fall prevention mechanism 95X is in use, it extends in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 83 and can be grounded. When the first shaft member 96X rotates from the state extending in the front-rear direction so as to extend in the up-down direction around the first shaft pin 98X, further rotation is restricted.

  The second shaft member 97X is assembled so as to be rotatable around a second shaft pin 99X extending in the left-right direction. The second shaft member 97X extends in the front-rear direction when the fall prevention mechanism 95X is not used, and is not visible from the front. On the other hand, when the fall prevention mechanism 95X is in use, it extends in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 83 and can be grounded. Then, when the second shaft member 97X rotates from the state extending in the front-rear direction so as to extend in the vertical direction around the second shaft pin 99X, further rotation is restricted.

  As described above, according to the fifth modification, as shown in FIG. 83, the first shaft member 96X and the second shaft member 97X extend downward from the lower side of the operation mechanism unit 230 in the use state of the fall prevention mechanism 95X. Ground. Thereby, it is possible to support the pachinko gaming machine 1 at two places. Therefore, for example, it is possible to stabilize the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is self-supporting, as compared with a fall prevention mechanism that is grounded at only one place. And if it is the fall prevention mechanism 95X provided with the 1st shaft member 96X and the 2nd shaft member 97X, it comprises more compactly than the fall prevention mechanism 95 (refer FIG. 20) provided with the 1st plate 96 and the 2nd plate 97. It is possible. However, in terms of supporting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a well-balanced manner, the fall prevention mechanism 95 (see FIG. 25) including the first plate 96 that is grounded long in the front-rear direction and the second plate 97 that is grounded long in the left-right direction. preferable.

  In the fifth modification, the first shaft pin 98X extends in the left-right direction and the second shaft pin 99X extends in the front-rear direction. However, both the first shaft member 96X and the second shaft member 97X are grounded. If possible, the direction in which the shaft pins 98X and 99X extend can be changed as appropriate. For example, both the first shaft pin 98X and the second shaft pin 99X may extend in the front-rear direction, or may extend in the left-right direction.

<Other variations>
In the said form, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower end part (mainly lower cover 800) of the upper decoration part 200 was formed so that it might extend diagonally upward toward back. Further, in the third modification, as shown in FIG. 81, the rear portion 200B of the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is recessed above the front portion 200A. However, the shape of the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is not limited to the above-described shape and can be changed as appropriate as long as the player in the game can visually recognize the rear of the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55. .

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 6, the rear lower end part of the upper decoration part 200 was the rear lower end part 67X of the speakers 67L and 67R. However, the rear lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the lower cover 800 is formed to extend to the upper end position P7 of the glass plate 55, and the rear lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is lower. It may be the rear end portion of the side cover 800.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, most of the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 (more than half of the length in the front-rear direction of the upper decorative portion 200) is formed by the lower cover 800. However, a part of the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 (less than half the length of the upper decorative portion 200 in the front-rear direction) may be formed by the lower cover 800. However, when the player looks obliquely upward, in view of the effect of widening the field of view along the lower cover 800 and toward the upper end position P7 of the glass plate 55, the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 Most of them are preferably formed by the lower cover 800.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 4, the inclination | tilt angle (gamma) of the lower surface (inclined surface) of the lower cover 800 with respect to the horizontal surface was about 7 degree | times. However, if the front lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is below the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55 and the rear lower end portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is higher than the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55, the inclination is inclined. The angle γ can be changed as appropriate.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 55, by forming the rear side lower end part of the upper decoration part 200 above the upper part 55a of the glass plate 55, the upper part of the display screen 7a of the 2nd image display apparatus 7 is shown. 7b was made visible. However, in addition to the upper portion 7b of the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7, the upper portion of the decorative member or the game area 3 or the upper portion of the display screen 6a of the first image display device 6 may be visible.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 55, the upper part 55a of the glass plate 55 (window part) is located above the upper end 3X of the game area 3 in the height direction, and the uppermost end position ( The upper end position P7 was not included) and the range was 50 mm below. However, the upper portion 55a of the glass plate 55 (window portion) can be changed as appropriate. For example, the range may be 100 mm below the uppermost end position of the glass plate 55 from the position lower than the upper end 3X of the game area 3 in the height direction.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 20, the fall prevention mechanism 95 was provided in the bottom wall part 231 of the operation mechanism part 230. As shown in FIG. However, the place where the fall prevention mechanism 95 is disposed can be changed as appropriate as long as it is the operation mechanism unit 230 on the lower side of the gaming machine frame 50. It may be under the handle 60.

  Moreover, in the said form, the fall prevention mechanism 95 was provided substantially detachably from the operation mechanism part 230. FIG. However, the fall prevention mechanism 95 (in particular, the first plate 96 and the second plate 97) may be detachable from the operation mechanism unit 230. In this case, since the fall prevention mechanism 95 is hardly used after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the fall prevention mechanism 95 can be removed from the operation mechanism unit 230. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the aesthetic appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is impaired by the fall prevention mechanism 95.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the first plate 96 is grounded and the second plate 97 is grounded in the fall prevention mechanism 95 (grounding means). In the fifth modified example, as shown in FIG. 83, in the fall prevention mechanism 95X, the first shaft member 96X is grounded and the second shaft member 97X is grounded. However, the grounding means for supporting the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to one that is grounded by two members, and may be one that is grounded by one member or three or more members.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the second engagement portion 97c of the second plate 97 is engaged with the front surface 232b of the fixture 232 (engagement member), so that the first plate of the second plate 97 is engaged. The grounding state of the first plate 96 and the second plate 97 was maintained while restricting the rotation with respect to 96. However, the grounding state of the first plate 96 and the second plate 97 may be maintained by an engagement different from the above-described engagement. For example, the grounding state of the first plate 96 and the second plate 97 may be maintained by fitting (engaging) the second plate 97 and the fixture 232 in an uneven shape.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the first engaging portion 97b of the second plate 97 is engaged with the rear surface 232a of the fixture 232 by the forward biasing force of the winding spring 72 (biasing member). I let you. However, the first engaging portion 97b of the second plate 97 may be engaged with the rear surface 232a of the fixture 232 by a forward biasing force by another biasing member such as a plate spring or a coil spring.

  Moreover, in the said form, the special lock mechanism 49 was provided in the upper opposing edge part among the up-and-down left-right opposing edge parts which the inner frame 52 (base frame part) and the front frame 53 (opening-closing frame part) oppose (FIG. 18). (See (B)). However, among the upper, lower, left and right facing edges where the inner frame 52 and the front frame 53 face each other, the left facing edge (the fixed end side edge) extending in the vertical direction on the left side, or the lower side extending in the horizontal direction on the lower side A special locking mechanism may be provided at the opposite edge.

  Moreover, in the said form, the special lock mechanism 49 was provided in the center part 53M of the left-right direction among upper side opposing edges (refer FIG. 2). However, the special lock mechanism 49 may be provided at the left end (fixed end side) or the right end (free end side) of the upper facing edge. Note that the number of the special lock mechanisms 49 is not limited to the case where only one is provided on the upper facing edge portion, and two or more special lock mechanisms 49 may be provided. For example, you may provide in the center part 53M and right end part of an upper facing edge part. Or you may provide in the center part 53M and the left end part of an upper opposing edge part. Or you may provide in the left end part and right end part of an upper facing part. Or you may provide in the center part 53M of an upper opposing edge part, a left end part, and a right end part.

  Moreover, in the said form, in order to maintain firmly the closed state of the inner frame 52 (base frame part) and the front frame 53 (opening-closing frame part), the special lock mechanism 49 was provided. However, a special lock mechanism may be provided to firmly maintain the closed state of the outer frame (base frame portion) and the inner frame (opening / closing frame portion). In this case, among the upper, lower, left and right facing edges where the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52 face each other, the upper facing edge extending in the left-right direction on the upper side, the lower facing edge extending in the left-right direction on the lower side, the right side A special locking mechanism may be provided on either the right facing edge (free end side edge) extending in the vertical direction or the left facing edge (fixed end side edge) extending in the vertical direction on the left side.

  Moreover, in the said form, in order to enable the locking by the special lock mechanism 49, the special locking piece 56f (insertion convex part) was provided in the base frame 56 of the front frame 53 (opening-closing frame part). The special locking piece 56f is inserted into the opening 78d (insertion recess) of the upper fixing frame 78 attached to the holding frame 58 of the inner frame 52 (base frame). However, a special locking piece is provided on the holding frame 58 of the inner frame 52. Then, the special locking piece may be inserted into an opening provided in the base frame 56 of the front frame 53 so as to be locked by the special lock mechanism.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the special locking piece 56 f (insertion convex portion) of the base frame 56 is inserted into the opening 78 d (insertion concave portion) of the upper fixed frame 78, and the special locking piece 56 f is inserted into the L of the left and right slide frames 79. The special lock mechanism 49 can be locked by engaging (hanging) with the character portion 79d (engaging portion). However, a structure other than the special locking piece 56f, the opening 78d, and the L-shaped portion 79d may be used. For example, an electronic component such as a solenoid or a motor, an adhesive member, or the like may be used.

  Moreover, in the said form, when the front frame 53 is closed with respect to the inner frame 52, if the key is turned to the left with the key inserted into the keyhole with respect to the locking device main body 48a, the closed state by the normal lock mechanism 47 is achieved. Can be released and the closed state by the special lock mechanism 49 can be released. However, in addition to the locking device 48, a dedicated closing release device that can release the closed state by the special lock mechanism 49 may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, when the front frame 53 is closed with respect to the inner frame 52, the special lock mechanism 49 is naturally locked. However, after the lock by the normal lock mechanism 47 is performed, the lock by the special lock mechanism may be arbitrarily performed by operating the operation means (button, switch, etc.).

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown to FIG. 8 (B), the inner side protruding part 46f and the outer side protruding part 46g were provided in the upper surface part 46a1 of the outer frame side support member 46a (fixed side hinge member). When the inner frame 52 rotates, as shown in FIGS. 12A, 12B, and 12C, the inner frame side placement member 46c (rotation side hinge member) is moved to the inner raised portion 46f and the outer raised portion. It was made to slide with respect to the part 46g. However, an inner raised portion (convex portion) and an outer raised portion (other convex portions) are provided on the lower surface of the inner frame side mounting member 46c. And when the inner frame 52 rotates, you may make it the outer frame side support member 46a slide with respect to an inner side protruding part and an outer side protruding part. That is, in the present specification, "the hinge member is slidable with respect to the convex portion or other convex portion" is only required that the hinge member and the convex portion are relatively slidable, Which of the hinge member and the convex portion (other convex portion) may be the fixed side or the movable side.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown to FIG. 10 (B), the L-shaped protruding part 46h was provided in the horizontal part 46d1 of the inner frame side supporting member 46d (fixed side hinge member). When the front frame 53 rotates, as shown in FIGS. 14A, 14B, and 14C, the front frame side mounting member 46e (the rotation side hinge member) is moved with respect to the L-shaped raised portion 46h. And let it slide. However, an L-shaped raised portion is provided on the lower surface of the front frame side mounting member 46e. And when the front frame 53 rotates, you may make it slide the inner frame side support member 46d with respect to an L-shaped protruding part.

  Moreover, in the said form, the 1st protruding part 46h1 (convex part), the 2nd protruding part 46h2 (other convex part), and the L-shaped protruding part 46h (convex part) were provided in the lower hinge mechanism 46. FIG. However, the upper hinge mechanism 45 may be provided with a convex portion or another convex portion. Specifically, a convex portion or another convex portion may be provided on the lower surface of the attachment portion 45a2 of the outer frame side connecting member 45a shown in FIG. Alternatively, a convex portion or other convex portion is provided on the lower surface of the upper wall portion or the upper surface of the lower wall portion in the U-shaped portion of the inner frame side mounting member 45c shown in FIG. Anyway. Or you may make it provide a convex part or another convex part in the front frame side attachment member (illustration omitted) provided in the upper left part of the base frame 56 of the front frame 53 shown in FIG.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown to FIG. 8 (B), the inner side protruding part 46f (convex part) is formed in circular arc shape in planar view, and the outer side protruding part 46g (other convex part) is linearly formed in planar view. Formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, the L-shaped raised portion 46h was formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. However, the shape of the convex portion or the other convex portion in plan view is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate. However, the sliding friction can be reduced as it is formed so as to follow the concentric circles GA and GB around the rotation center H1 as much as possible.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 13, the 1st protruding part 46h1 (convex part), the 2nd protruding part 46h2 (other convex part), or the L-shaped protruding part 46h protrudes in circular arc shape in a longitudinal cross section. I did it. However, the shape of the convex portion or the other convex portion in the longitudinal section can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, a rectangular shape. However, from the viewpoint of reducing sliding resistance (friction resistance), an arc shape that can make point contact in the longitudinal section is preferable. For example, it may be raised in a triangular shape. However, since it is easily damaged when supported at the apex part of an acute angle or an obtuse angle, the arc shape is preferable from the viewpoint that the supported part is not easily damaged.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown to FIG. 8 (B), neither the inner side protruding part 46f nor the outer side protruding part 46g is formed along the concentric circle GA around the rotation center H1. However, either one of the inner raised portion 46f and the outer raised portion 46g is formed along the concentric circle GA around the rotation center H1, and either one is formed along the concentric circle GA around the rotation center H1. You may make it do. Alternatively, both may be formed along a concentric circle GA around the rotation center H1. In this case, the sliding resistance acting on the inner frame side mounting member 46c can be minimized.

  Moreover, in the said form, it demonstrated as the structure which blocks the opening part 53a of the front frame 53 with the glass plate 55. FIG. However, the window member that closes the opening portion 53a of the front frame 53 is not limited to the glass plate 55, but is made of a material that can transmit visible light, and may be any material that can visually recognize a predetermined area of the game board 2. . Specifically, the window member may be a light transmissive resin such as an acrylic plate, for example. Further, the window member may have a laminated structure in which a plurality of windows are laminated in the front-rear direction instead of a single-sheet structure. Moreover, in the window member of laminated structure, the space | interval may be provided between the members to laminate | stack. Specifically, for example, the window member may be configured by providing a gap between a first window member positioned at the front and a second window member positioned at the rear. In the window member having such a laminated structure, the front surface thereof is the front surface of the frontmost member in the lamination. Further, in the window member having the laminated structure, the rear surface is the rear surface of the member positioned rearmost in the lamination.

  Further, the decoration of the curtain plate 51a is not limited to that shown in FIG. 3, and other decorations may be used. Specifically, a decoration with a pattern different from that in FIG. 3 may be applied. In addition, for example, the decoration is not limited to the unevenness (shape), but may be a decoration composed only of colors, or a combination of shapes and colors. Further, for example, a work name, a character, a catch phrase, a serif or the like that is a motif of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be used for decoration. In this case, in the game hall, the player can easily find the pachinko gaming machine 1 using the curtain 51a as a mark. In addition, for example, a manufacturer name that manufactures and sells the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be attached. In this case, even in a game hall (hall) where various pachinko machines are installed, a player can easily find the pachinko machine 1 manufactured and sold by the manufacturer using the curtain 51a as a mark. It becomes.

  Further, the decoration mode of the left decoration unit 210 is not limited to the color divided into three in the left-right direction described above, and may be other modes. However, it is preferable that the left decoration unit 210 has a uniform decoration as a whole.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first image display device 6, the board movable body 15 (the first board movable body 15 </ b> A, the second board movable body 15 </ b> B, the first board movable body 15) are arranged behind the game board 2 so as to be able to overlap each other. It is assumed that four layers of decorative members made of three-panel movable body 15C) are arranged. However, the decorative members provided in an arrangement that can overlap each other behind the game board 2 are not limited to four layers. That is, for example, five or more layers may be used. In this case, a wider variety of effects can be performed. Further, in the above embodiment, three layers of movable bodies including the first board movable body 15A, the second board movable body 15B, and the third board movable body 15C are arranged so as to overlap each other behind the game board 2. It is supposed to be. However, the movable bodies provided in an arrangement that can overlap each other behind the game board 2 are not limited to three layers. That is, for example, four or more layers may be used. In this case, a wider variety of effects can be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the movable frame body 400 is moved from the standby position to the operating position, the movable frame body 400 is rotated around the rotation pin 332 (rotary shaft) and the connection pin 370 (axial center O1) for rotatably mounting the movable frame body 400. (See FIGS. 41A and 41B, FIGS. 42A and 42B, and FIGS. 43A and 43B). However, the rotation pin 332 may be moved linearly (linearly moved) using a slide mechanism or the like. In this case, the rotating pin 332 may be moved forward or the rotating pin 332 may be moved backward until the movable frame body 400 is moved from the standby position to the operating position. Alternatively, the rotating pin 332 may be moved forward or the rotating pin 332 may be moved backward until the movable frame body 400 is moved from the standby position to the operating position.

  Moreover, in the said form, when moving the frame movable body 400 from a standby position to an operation position, after moving the rotating pin 332 (rotating shaft) ahead, it was made to move back. However, the direction in which the rotation pin 332 is moved can be changed as appropriate. For example, when moving the movable frame body 400 from the standby position to the operating position, the rotary pin 332 may be moved backward and then moved forward. Alternatively, the rotary pin 332 may be moved straight forward (moved linearly) and then moved forward. Alternatively, the rotary pin 332 may be moved straight forward and then moved forward.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the movable frame body 400 in the operating position is located above the upper edge 50U of the gaming machine frame 50. However, the movable frame body 400 in the operating position may be located below the upper edge 50U of the gaming machine frame 50. That is, the frame movable body 400 may be provided in the upper decorative portion 200 or may move within a range below the upper edge 50U of the gaming machine frame 50. The frame movable body 400 may be provided in the left decoration unit 210, the right decoration unit 220, or the operation mechanism unit 230.

  In the above embodiment, the movable frame body 400 at the standby position is located above the upper edge of the gaming machine frame 50. However, the movable frame body 400 in the standby position may be disposed below the upper edge of the gaming machine frame 50.

  Moreover, in the said form, the rotating pin 332 (rotating shaft) which attaches the frame movable body 400 rotatably was extended in the left-right direction. However, the direction in which the rotating shaft extends can be changed as appropriate. For example, the rotating shaft may extend in the front-rear direction or in the up-down direction. Alternatively, the rotating shaft may be inclined with respect to any one of the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction.

  In the above embodiment, when the movable frame body 400 is moved from the standby position to the operating position, the rear end portion 400Y of the movable frame body 400 is moved forward and upward (see FIGS. 62C and 62D). ). However, the front end portion 400X of the movable frame body 400 may be moved rearward and upward (see FIGS. 62A and 62B).

  Further, in the above embodiment, by moving the movable frame body 400 from the standby position to the operating position, the vertical length of the movable frame body 400 becomes larger than either the length in the front-rear direction or the length in the left-right direction. So that he stood up. However, the movable frame 400 in the operating position has a length in the front-rear direction that is greater than the length in the vertical direction or the length in the left-right direction, or the length in the left-right direction is the length in the vertical direction. Alternatively, it may be larger than any of the lengths in the front-rear direction. Note that “standing” described in the present embodiment includes not only the state in which the movable frame body 400 extends in the vertical direction but also includes the state in which the frame movable body 400 extends obliquely upward toward the front. As long as it gives the impression of extending beyond either the front-rear direction or the left-right direction.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 36 or FIG. 78, even if the power is not turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, by rotating the hexagonal shaft portions 321a and 321b (operation means), the movable frame body 400 is moved. Moved from the standby position to the operating position. However, the operation means for moving the frame movable body 400 is not limited to the hexagonal shaft portions 321a and 321b, and may be a lever or a button, for example. However, it is preferable that the operation means can be operated with a dedicated tool (such as a hexagon wrench) so that the player cannot easily perform the operation.

  Moreover, in the said form, the hexagonal shaft part 321a, 321b (operation means) which can move the frame movable body 400 (movable member) provided in the gaming machine frame 50 from a standby position to an operation position was provided. However, an operating means capable of moving a movable member (for example, the movable board 15) provided in the game board 2 from the standby position to the operating position may be provided. In this case, the operating means may be provided on a member on the gaming machine frame 50 (front frame 53 or inner frame 52) side, or may be provided on a member on the game board 2 side.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the face unit 403 (a part of the movable member) is not exposed when the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position, and the face unit 403 is not exposed when the movable frame body 400 is in the operating position. The unit 403 was exposed. However, the face unit 403 may be exposed even when the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position.

  36, the link unit 302 is provided with a hexagonal shaft portion 321a (operation means) as shown in FIG. 36, and the hexagonal shaft portion 321b (on the rear surface side of the base frame 56 of the front frame 53 as shown in FIG. 78). Operation means). However. The location of the operating means that can move the movable frame body 400 can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the operating means is provided on the rear surface side of the inner frame 52 and the inner frame 52 (second frame member) is opened with respect to the outer frame 51 (first frame member), the operating means can be operated. Anyway.

  Moreover, in the said form, the frame movable body 400 (1st movable body) and the ear member 540 (2nd movable body) were provided in the gaming machine frame 50 (upper decoration part 200). When there is detection by the movable space photosensor 309, the ear member 540 can be moved from the storage position (second standby position) to the protruding position (second operation position), while the movable space photosensor 309 is used. When there is no detection due to, the ear member 540 is made immovable from the storage position to the protruding position. However, the first movable body and the second movable body provided other than the upper decorative portion 200 may be controlled as described above. For example, the first movable body and the second movable body provided on the game board may be controlled as described above.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the frame movable body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position, the output control of the pulse signal to the rotary motor 311 is completed, and the movable space photosensor 309 (specific position detecting means) detects it. The ear member 540 is moved from the stowed position to the protruding position on the condition that this is done. However, the ear member 540 may be moved from the storage position to the protruding position only on the condition that the movable space photosensor 309 is detecting. In this case, the ear member 540 is moved from the storage position to the protruding position at the timing when the movable frame body 400 is moved to the position (specific position) shown in FIG. 42B, that is, when the movable space KK is formed. It will be. That is, the ear member 540 is moved regardless of the movement of the movable frame body 400. Accordingly, it is possible to shorten the time until the movable frame body 400 at the standby position moves to the operating position and the ear member 540 at the storage position finishes moving to the protruding position. It is possible to avoid an unnecessarily long production time due to the movement of the movable body 400 and the ear member 540).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the movable body unit 201 does not form the movable space KK in which the ear member 540 can move from the storage position to the protruding position when the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position (see FIG. 41A). . On the other hand, the movable body unit 201 moves the movable space KK in the movable space KK until the frame movable body 400 moves from the position (specific position) shown in FIG. 42B to the operating position (see FIGS. 42A and 42B). Was to form. However, the movable body unit 201 may form the movable space KK only when the frame movable body 400 is in the operating position. In this case, the movable space photosensor 309 (specific position detecting means) may be arranged so as to detect only that the movable frame body 400 is in the operating position (specific position). Thus, if the movable space photosensor 309 is not detected, the ear member 540 is prevented from moving, so that the ear member 540 is moved to the protruding position before the movable frame body 400 is moved to the operating position. It is possible to reliably prevent the start of the operation. Alternatively, the movable body unit 201 may form the movable space KK at any position from the standby position to the operating position.

  Further, in the above embodiment, if the movable space photosensor 309 (specific position detecting means) is not detected based on the movement of the movable frame body 400 (first movable body) provided in the upper decoration portion 200, the upper decoration The ear member 540 (second movable body) provided in the portion 200 is configured not to move. However, the above-described configuration of the first movable body, the specific position detecting means, and the second movable body may be provided in addition to the upper decorative portion 200, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be provided on the left decoration unit 210, the right decoration unit 220, or the operation mechanism unit 230, or may be provided on the game board 2.

  Moreover, in the said form, the rotation motor 311 (1st drive source) which moves the frame movable body 400, and the linear motion motor 550 (2nd drive source) which moves the ear member 540 were stepping motors. However, the first drive source or the second drive source may be a drive source other than the stepping motor, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the first drive source or the second drive source may be a solenoid, a servo motor, or the like.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 53, the shielding protrusion 843 (detection part) for the movable space photosensor 309 to detect was provided in the harness cover 840 (electrical wiring cover). However, the electrical wiring cover provided with the detection portion is not limited to the harness cover 840 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a detection portion may be provided for an electrical wiring cover that covers one electrical wiring.

  In the above embodiment, the formation of the movable space KK is detected by the movable space photosensor 309 (specific position detecting means). However, the specific position detection means is not limited to a photosensor (photoelectric sensor) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and may be configured by a microswitch, a proximity sensor, a magnetic sensor, or the like.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper side decoration part 200 so that the distance L1 from the upper side decoration part 200 to the outer frame 51 may be more than twice the distance L2 from the operation mechanism part 230 to the outer frame 51. Protruded greatly toward the front. However, the above-described distance L1 may not be twice or more than the above-described distance, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the upper decorative portion 200 may be configured such that the above-described distance L1 is at least greater than the above-described distance L2.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the right decorative portion 220 is set such that the distance L3 from the right decorative portion 220 to the outer frame 51 is at least twice the distance L2 from the operating mechanism portion 230 to the outer frame 51. Protruded greatly toward the front. However, the above-described distance L3 may not be twice or more than the above-described distance, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the right decorative portion 220 may be configured such that the above-described distance L3 is at least larger than the above-described distance L2.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the right decoration part 220 is configured to protrude largely forward from the operation mechanism part 230, but the left decoration part 210 faces forward from the operation mechanism part 230. It may be configured to protrude greatly. Then, any of the upper decoration part 200, the left decoration part 210, and the right decoration part 220 may be configured to largely protrude forward from the operation mechanism part 230. In this case, the player can be surrounded by the upper decoration part 200 on the upper side, the left decoration part 210 on the left side, and the right decoration part 220 on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to form a space for wrapping the upper and left and right decorative parts at a position closer to the player than in the above form (see FIG. 61), and to concentrate the player on the game.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the upper lid member 240 (hidden member) bends the front plate 241 upward when the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position, thereby It was possible to form a visual contact space SK that allows the user to visually recognize the part (design part) and contact it. However, the hidden member for forming the visual contact space SK is not limited to the upper lid member 240 and can be appropriately changed. For example, the front cover 260 is configured to tilt forward. Thereby, when the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position, the front cover 260 may be tilted forward to form a visual contact space where the face portion of the face unit 403 can be visually recognized and contacted.

  Moreover, in the said form, the upper side cover member 240 (hidden member) was provided so that the face unit 403 of the frame movable body 400 provided in the upper side decoration part 200 could be visually recognized and contacted. However, the location of the hidden member is not limited to the upper decorative part 200, but may be the left decorative part 210, the right decorative part 220, or the operation mechanism part 230. For example, a part of the sheath member 222 provided in the right decorative portion 220 can be opened and closed, and even if the sword member 221 is in the accommodation position by opening a part of the sheath member 222, the sword member The sword tip portion 221a (see FIG. 4) 221 may be visible and contactable. Thereby, it is possible to remove dirt, dust, and the like attached to the sword tip portion 221a.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, when the frame movable body 400 is in the standby position, the upper lid member 240 (hidden member) includes the rear plate 242 fixed to the rear side and is bent to the front side. A possible front plate 241 was provided. However, the configuration of the hidden member can be changed as appropriate. For example, the hidden member may include a front plate fixed to the front side and a rear plate that can be bent to the rear side. Further, the hidden member does not have to be composed of two plates, but may be composed of one plate or three or more plates.

  Moreover, in the said form, the upper side cover member 240 (hidden member) can form above-mentioned visual contact space SK by bending the front side plate 241 upwards (specific operation). However, the specific operation for forming the visual contact space in the hidden member can be changed as appropriate. For example, the hidden member can be configured to form the visual contact space SK using the driving force of a motor or solenoid. And based on operation (specific operation) to a predetermined operation means (button etc.), you may make it drive the above-mentioned motor and solenoid. Thus, the concealing member does not have to be a plate, and the above-described visual contact space SK may be formed by a driving unit such as a motor or a solenoid or a biasing unit such as a spring. Further, for example, when the movable frame body 400 is in the standby position, by touching the touch electrode 263 (detected by the touch sensor 264), as shown in FIG. 41 (B) from the state shown in FIG. The rotation motor 311 is slightly driven. Accordingly, the upper lid member 240 may be inclined obliquely upward from the substantially horizontal state (see FIG. 41B), and the above-described visual contact space SK may be formed. Thereby, it is possible to form the visual contact space SK more simply than when the front plate 241 is bent manually.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the upper lid member 240 (hidden member) rotates the rotating member 360 so as not to hinder the movement of the movable frame body 400 when the movable frame body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position. It rotated with it (refer FIG. 41 (A) (B), FIG. 42 (A)). However, the hidden member may be one that does not move (fixed) regardless of the movement of the movable frame body 400.

  Moreover, in the said form, the ear unit 402 (two-way moving mechanism) for moving the ear member 540 in two directions was provided in the upper decoration part 200. However, the arrangement location of the two-way moving mechanism is not limited to the upper decorative portion 200 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the two-way moving mechanism may be provided in the left decoration unit 210, the right decoration unit 220, or the operation mechanism unit 230, or may be provided in the game board 2. In short, the movable body for moving in two directions by one drive source may be provided in any part of the gaming machine frame 50 or the gaming board 2.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the ear unit 402 (two-way moving mechanism) tilts the ear member 540 (movable body) in the direction along the linear motion rail 530 (first reference direction) and the left and right with the contact portion TB as a fulcrum. It was made possible to move in the direction (second reference direction). However, the first reference direction and the second reference direction are not limited to the above-described directions, and can be changed as appropriate. That is, the first reference direction and the second reference direction in which the movable body can be moved by the two-way moving mechanism are the direction in which the movable body moves linearly (vertical direction, horizontal direction, front-rear direction), the direction that tilts (swings), and the rotation The directions may be combined as appropriate. In this case, the first reference direction and the second reference direction may be set as the directions in which the first reference direction and the second reference direction are linearly moved, for example, the vertical direction and the front-rear direction.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the ear unit 402 (two-way moving mechanism) for moving the ear member 540 in two directions is a receiving member that regulates the movement of the rack 543, the pinion 551, and the ear member 540 in the linear direction. 620 at least. However, the configuration of the two-way moving mechanism may be a configuration that does not include a rack and a pinion, for example, a configuration that includes a feed screw, a ball screw, a slide mechanism, a link mechanism, a rotation mechanism, and the like.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 59, the frame movable body 400 was stood up so that it might extend diagonally upward toward the front in an operation position. However, the posture when the frame movable body 400 is in the operating position is possible as appropriate. For example, the movable frame body 400 may be erected in the vertical direction at the operating position. In this case, the vertical length of the movable frame body 400 at the operating position can be maximized, and the impact due to the size can be increased.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 from the state shown in FIG. 1, when the frame movable body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position, mainly the upper wall portion, the front wall portion, and the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 are moved. The wall was deformed (displaced). However, any one of the upper wall part, the front wall part, the lower wall part, the right wall part, and the left wall part of the upper decorative part 200, or any two, or any three, or any four are provided. The frame movable body 400 may be moved from the standby position to the operating position so as to be deformed (displaced). Further, the movable frame body 400 may be moved from the standby position to the operating position so that the upper wall portion, the front wall portion, the lower wall portion, the right wall portion, and the left wall portion of the upper decoration portion 200 are deformed. Thus, the more the deformed wall portion in the upper decorative portion 200, the stronger the impact when the movable frame body 400 moves. In addition, the wall part of the upper decoration part 200 which deform | transforms with the movement of the frame movable body 400 may deform | transform only a part of the wall part.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 60 from the state shown in FIG. 6, the frame movable body 400 is moved from a standby position so that the front wall part and lower wall part of the upper decoration part 200 may mainly deform | transform (displace). Moved to the operating position. However, the movable frame body may be moved from the standby position to the operating position so that only the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is deformed (displaced). In this case, the movable frame body moves downward from the lower wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200, and it is possible for the player to show an unexpected movement of the movable frame body. Alternatively, the movable frame body may be moved from the standby position to the operating position so that only the front wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 is deformed (displaced). In this case, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player who thought that the front wall part of the upper decorative part 200 is a fixed object.

  Moreover, in the said form, when the frame movable body 400 exists in a stand-by position, the front wall part of the upper decoration part 200 is comprised by the front cover 260 integral with the frame movable body 400 (refer FIG. 36), and an upper decoration part The lower wall portion 200 is configured by a lower cover 800 integrated with the frame movable body 400 (see FIG. 37). Thus, when the movable frame body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position, the movable frame body 400, the front cover 260 (the front wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200), and the lower cover 800 (the lower wall of the upper decorative portion 200). Part) moved together. However, the wall portion that moves integrally with the movable frame body 400 among the wall portions of the upper decorative portion 200 can be changed as appropriate.

  For example, when the movable frame body 400 moves from the standby position to the operating position, the movable frame body 400, the front cover 260, the lower cover 800, and the upper lid member 240 (upper wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200) are integrated. You may make it move to. In this case, it is possible to show the player a very innovative movement in which the three wall portions of the upper decorative portion 200 move together with the movement of the movable frame body 400. In short, the wall part that moves integrally with the frame movable body 400 among the wall parts of the upper decorative part 200 is any one of the upper wall part, the front wall part, the lower wall part, the right wall part, and the left wall part. Or any two, any three, or any four. Moreover, the wall part which moves integrally with the frame movable body 400 among each wall part of the upper decoration part 200 may be an upper wall part, a front wall part, a lower wall part, a right side wall part, and a left side wall part. Thus, the more the wall portion of the upper decorative part 200 that moves together with the movable frame body 400, the stronger the impact when the movable frame body 400 moves. It should be noted that only a part of the wall portion of the upper decorative portion 200 that is deformed as the movable frame body 400 moves may be moved together with the movable frame body 400.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the SP reach is executed, the movable frame body 400 is moved from the standby position to the operating position. However, when moving the frame movable body 400 from the standby position to the operating position, it can be changed as appropriate, and when performing a special SP reach, winning a jackpot, or fraud against the pachinko gaming machine 1 is detected. If necessary, it can be changed as appropriate.

  Moreover, in the said form, as shown in FIG. 28, the 2nd image display apparatus 7 was being fixed in the state inclined diagonally upward toward the front. However, the posture of the second image display device 7 can be changed as appropriate, and may stand up in the vertical direction, for example. Further, the second image display device 7 may be configured to be movable (tilted or linearly moved).

  In the above embodiment, the operation mechanism section 230 (game medium storage tray section) is provided on the front frame 53, but the operation mechanism section (game medium storage section) is attached to the inner frame and faces the front of the gaming machine frame. It may be a configuration that In this case, the operation mechanism part (game medium storage tray part) attached to the inner frame is included in the “front frame part”.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not execute a small hit game, but may be a pachinko game machine capable of executing a small hit game. Note that the total opening time of the big winning opening in the small hit game is preferably set to 1.8 seconds or less so that an unintended amount of prize balls is not made.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine that is shifted to the high probability state based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 has been described, but the pachinko gaming machine that is shifted to the high probability state according to the type of the special symbol, or so-called You may comprise as other types of game machines, such as a 1 type 2 type mixing machine and a 2 type game machine (wing type game machine). The gaming state after the jackpot game may be determined based on a combination of the special symbol type and the gaming state at the time of winning.

  In addition, the dimension demonstrated by the said form is shown as an example to the last, Comprising: It can change suitably. Also, the form of the accessory (frame movable body 400, ear member 540, jaw member 730, etc.) provided in the gaming machine frame 50 is shown as an example only, and can be changed as appropriate.

  In addition, the term “extending in the vertical direction” in the present specification is sufficient if it can give a long impression in the vertical direction among the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction (up / down / left / right front / rear direction). It is meant to include those that are inclined with respect to. In addition, the term “extends in the left-right direction” in the present specification only needs to be able to give a long impression in the left-right direction among the up-down, left-right, front-rear directions, and includes those that are inclined with respect to the left-right direction. Meaning. In addition, the term “extending in the front-rear direction” in the present specification is not limited as long as it can give a long impression in the front-rear direction among the up-down, left-right, front-rear directions, and includes those inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. Meaning.

  In the present specification, “establishment of predetermined control conditions” means that in the above-described form, a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, and the jackpot symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed. It is to be done.

9. Inventions described in the above-described embodiments In the above-described embodiments, the inventions of the following means are shown. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiment, and reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the component of each invention is not limited to this supplementary note.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A gaming machine frame (50) including a frame-shaped base frame portion (outer frame 51 and inner frame 52) and a front frame portion (front frame 53) located on the front side of the base frame portion;
The gaming machine frame is
A window member (glass plate 55) that makes a predetermined area (game area 3) provided inside the gaming machine frame visible;
An upper decorative part (upper decorative part 200) that is positioned above the window member and decorates the upper part of the gaming machine frame,
The upper decorative portion has a predetermined specific portion (the rear lower end portion 67X of the speakers 67L and 67R) formed above the upper portion (55a) of the window member, so that the upper portion of the window member is It is a gaming machine configured to be able to visually recognize the back (see FIG. 55).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the specific portion of the upper decorative portion is formed above the upper portion of the window member. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the rear of the upper portion of the window member.

The invention according to means A2
In the gaming machine described in means A1,
The upper decorative part is
It is formed so that its lower end is positioned upward as it goes rearward (see FIG. 4),
Among the lower ends, a front lower end portion (a portion at a lower end position P6 on the front side of the upper decorative portion 200) and a rear lower end portion (a rear part of the speakers 67L and 67R) located on the rear side among the lower ends. Side lower end portion 67X),
The front lower end portion is located below the upper portion of the window member, while the rear lower end portion as the specific portion is located above the upper portion of the window member ( (See FIG. 4).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the lower end portion on the front side of the upper decoration portion is positioned below the upper portion of the window member. Therefore, if the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion is formed horizontally from the lower end portion of the front end toward the rear, the rear of the upper portion of the window member cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of this configuration, the lower end portion of the upper decorative portion is formed to be positioned upward and the rear lower end portion of the upper decorative portion is positioned above the upper portion of the window member. Like to do. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the rear of the upper portion of the window member.

The invention according to means A3 is
In the gaming machine described in means A2,
The gaming machine frame is
A game medium storage unit (operation mechanism unit 230) that is positioned below the window member and can store a game medium (game ball);
A curtain plate portion (curtain plate 51a) located below the game medium storage portion,
The length (distance L1) from the front end position (P1) of the upper decoration portion to the front end position (front surface position P2) of the curtain plate portion is determined from the front end position (P3) of the game medium storage portion to the curtain plate portion. It is a gaming machine characterized by being at least twice the length to the front end position (distance L2).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the length from the front end position of the upper decoration portion to the front end position of the curtain plate portion is more than twice the length from the front end position of the game medium storage portion to the front end position of the curtain plate portion. Therefore, the upper side of the gaming machine protrudes greatly forward. Therefore, the upper part of the gaming machine is easy to hang down, and the front lower end portion of the upper decoration part is easily arranged below the upper part of the window member. Therefore, as described above, the rear lower end portion of the upper decorative portion is positioned above the upper portion of the window member, so that the visibility behind the upper portion of the window member can be ensured.

The invention according to means A4 is
In the gaming machine according to means A2 or means A3,
The upper decorative portion has at least a part of the lower end portion (lower cover 800) as an inclined surface extending obliquely upward toward the rear (see FIG. 55),
A virtual straight line (straight line T1 indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 4) extending obliquely upward rearward along the inclined surface extends so as to coincide with or substantially coincide with the upper end position (P7) of the window member. It is a gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the inclined surface of the lower end portion of the upper decoration portion is formed to extend toward the upper end position of the window member. Therefore, when the player looks obliquely upward, the player feels that the field of view gradually increases along the inclined surface, and can visually recognize the rear of the upper portion of the window member without a sense of incongruity.

The invention according to means A5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means A2 to means A4,
A first display device (first image display device 6) having a predetermined first display screen (6a);
A second display device (second image display device 7) having at least a part disposed above the first display device and having a predetermined second display screen (7a),
At least a part (upper part 7b) of the second display screen is arranged above the predetermined area and behind the upper part of the window member (see FIG. 55). This is a gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the lower end portion on the rear side of the upper decoration portion is formed above the upper portion of the window member, so that the second display screen above the predetermined area is visually recognized. It is possible. Therefore, the player can view the display screen in a wider range.

The invention according to means A6 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A gaming machine frame (50) including a frame-shaped base frame portion (outer frame 51 and inner frame 52) and a front frame portion (front frame 53) located on the front side of the base frame portion;
A gaming board (2) housed inside the gaming machine frame;
The gaming machine frame is
A window member (glass plate 55) that makes a predetermined area (game area 3) provided inside the gaming machine frame visible;
An upper decorative part (upper decorative part 200) that is positioned above the window member and decorates the upper part of the gaming machine frame,
The game board includes a game board visual recognition area that is visible from the front through the window member (see FIG. 27).
The upper decorative part is
The lower end portion is formed so as to be positioned upward as it goes rearward,
Among the lower ends, a front lower end portion (a portion at a lower end position P6 on the front side of the upper decorative portion 200) and a rear lower end portion (a rear part of the speakers 67L and 67R) located on the rear side among the lower ends. Side lower end portion 67X),
The front lower end portion is located below the upper end position (P7) of the game board visual recognition area, while the rear lower end portion is located above the upper end position of the game board visual recognition area. There is a gaming machine (see FIGS. 4 and 6).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the front lower end portion of the upper decoration portion is formed below the upper end position of the game board visual recognition area. However, the lower end portion of the upper decoration portion is formed so as to be located upward and the rear lower end portion of the upper decoration portion is formed above the upper end position of the game board visual recognition area. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the rear of the upper portion of the window member.

  By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-16722, the lower end of the upper decoration part (the lowermost end of the effect movable object 17) can be lower than the position of the upper part of the glass plate. If it becomes so, there existed a possibility that it would be difficult for a player to visually recognize the back of the upper part of a glass plate (window member). Therefore, in the invention according to the above-described means A1 to A6, the upper decoration part is formed with a predetermined specific part above the upper part of the window member, with respect to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-16722. It is different by the point comprised so that the back of the upper part of a window member can be visually recognized. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of easily recognizing the rear of the upper portion of the window member.

<Means B>
The invention according to means B1 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A gaming machine frame (50) including a frame-shaped base frame portion (outer frame 51 and inner frame 52) and a front frame portion (front frame 53) located on the front side of the base frame portion;
The gaming machine frame is
A window (glass plate 55) that allows a predetermined area (game area 3) provided inside the gaming machine frame to be visually recognized;
A game medium storage part (operation mechanism part 230) that is located below the window part and can store a game medium (game ball);
A gaming machine comprising grounding means (a fall prevention mechanism 95) provided in the game medium storage unit and capable of being grounded by extending downward from the game medium storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the grounding means extends downward from the game medium storage unit and is grounded, so that the gaming machine can be prevented from falling forward. In other words, even a gaming machine that cannot stand by itself without grounding means can make the gaming machine stand alone by the grounding means.

The invention according to means B2
In the gaming machine described in means B1,
The grounding means comprises a first grounding member (first plate 96) capable of grounding and a second grounding member (second plate 97) capable of grounding.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, in the grounding means extending downward from the game medium storage unit, the first grounding member is grounded and the second grounding member is grounded. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the state in which the gaming machine is self-supporting as compared with the grounding means provided with only one of the first grounding member and the second grounding member.

The invention according to means B3 is
In the gaming machine described in means B2,
The first grounding member can be grounded longer in the front-rear direction than in the left-right direction,
The second grounding member can be grounded longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 25).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the grounding means can be grounded in the longitudinal direction by the first grounding member and can be grounded in the lateral direction by the second grounding member. Thereby, it is possible to support a game machine with sufficient balance.

The invention according to means B4 is
In the gaming machine described in means B3,
The grounding means is
When the first grounding member and the second grounding member are grounded,
The first grounding member extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction,
The second grounding member extends in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction,
A rotating shaft (second shaft pin 99) extending in the vertical direction and rotatably mounting the second grounding member with respect to the first grounding member;
An engaging member (fixing tool 232) provided on the lower side of the game medium storage portion and engageable with the second grounding member;
While the second grounding member and the engaging member are engaged, the grounding state of the first grounding member and the second grounding member is regulated while restricting the rotation of the second grounding member with respect to the first grounding member. This is a gaming machine characterized by maintaining (see FIG. 24).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, since the second grounding member is rotatably assembled to the first grounding member via the rotation shaft, the first grounding member and the second grounding member are grounded. The second grounding member may rotate. Therefore, by engaging the second grounding member and the engaging member, it is possible to firmly maintain the grounding state of the first grounding member and the second grounding member while restricting the rotation of the second grounding member. is there. In other words, by restricting the rotation of the second grounding member that is grounded in the left-right direction, the grounding reaction force by the gaming machine can be accurately received by the second grounding member.

The invention according to means B5 is
In the gaming machine described in means B4,
The second grounding member includes a front engagement portion (second engagement portion 97c) disposed in front of the engagement member when extending in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.
The grounding means is
When the first grounding member and the second grounding member are grounded,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a rearward ground reaction force acts on the second grounding member to engage the front engaging portion and the engaging member (see FIG. 24).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the second grounding member extending in the up-down direction and the left-right direction is arranged so that the front engagement portion is positioned in front of the engagement member. As a result, in a gaming machine that is about to fall forward, a grounding reaction force in the backward direction acts on the second grounding member, so that the front engaging portion engages toward the engaging member behind the second grounding member. . In this way, a configuration for accurately receiving the ground reaction force can be realized with a simple configuration in which the front engagement portion is disposed in front of the engagement member.

The invention according to means B6 is
In the gaming machine described in means B5,
The second grounding member includes a rear engagement portion (first engagement portion 97b) disposed behind the engagement member when extending in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction,
The grounding means is
When the first grounding member extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction and the second grounding member extends in the up-down direction and the left-right direction,
A biasing member (winding spring 72) for biasing the second grounding member forward;
A gaming machine characterized in that a forward urging force of the urging member acts on the second grounding member to engage the rear engagement portion and the engagement member (see FIG. 24). It is.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the urging force in the forward direction by the urging means acts on the second grounding member, so that the rear engagement portion is engaged toward the engagement member located in front of the second grounding member. Accordingly, it is possible to maintain a state in which the first grounding member extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and the second grounding member extends in the vertical direction and the left-right direction. That is, it is possible to maintain the state before grounding by the grounding means using the rear engagement portion and the urging member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the work when the grounding means is grounded.

The invention according to means B7 is
In the gaming machine described in means B6,
The front engagement portion and the rear engagement portion protrude upward from the upper edge (97U) of the second grounding member when the second grounding member extends in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Yes,
The amount of protrusion (SB) upward of the front engaging portion is smaller than the amount of upward protrusion (SA) of the rear engaging portion (see FIG. 24).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the upward protrusion amount of the front engagement portion is smaller than the upward protrusion amount of the rear engagement portion. Therefore, when the second grounding member is rotated around the rotation shaft, the shorter one is compared with the case where the amount of protrusion upward of the front engagement portion and the amount of protrusion upward of the rear engagement portion are the same. It is possible to make it easier to dispose the front engagement portion on the front side of the engagement member. Furthermore, it is possible to easily engage the longer rear engagement portion with the rear side of the engagement member.

The invention according to means B8 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B7,
The gaming machine frame is positioned above the window portion, and is positioned below the upper decoration portion (upper decoration portion 200) for decorating the upper portion of the gaming machine frame and the gaming medium storage portion. A curtain plate portion (curtain plate 51a),
The length (distance L1) from the front end position (P1) of the upper decoration portion to the front end position (front surface position P2) of the curtain plate portion is determined from the front end position (P3) of the game medium storage portion to the curtain plate portion. It is a gaming machine characterized by being at least twice the length to the front end position (distance L2).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the length from the front end position of the upper decoration portion to the front end position of the curtain plate portion is more than twice the length from the front end position of the game medium storage portion to the front end position of the curtain plate portion. Therefore, the upper side of the gaming machine protrudes greatly forward. Therefore, the upper part of the gaming machine is turned forward, and the gaming machine itself is likely to fall forward. Therefore, even if the gaming machine is easy to fall forward, the grounding means can prevent the gaming machine from falling forward.

The invention according to means B9 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the means B2 to B8,
The grounding means is
When the first grounding member and the second grounding member are not grounded, the first grounding member and the second grounding member are extended from the front so that the first grounding member and the second grounding member extend in the horizontal direction. A gaming machine characterized in that the member is made invisible (see FIGS. 3 and 20).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the first grounding member and the second grounding member are extended in the horizontal direction so that the player cannot see the first grounding member and the second grounding member. Is possible. That is, it is possible to make it visible from the front only when the first grounding member and the second grounding member are grounded. Therefore, it is possible to avoid losing the beauty of the gaming machine.

The invention according to means B10 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A gaming machine frame including a frame-shaped base frame portion (outer frame 51 and inner frame 52) and a front frame portion (front frame 53) located on the front side of the base frame portion;
The gaming machine frame is
A window (glass plate 55) that allows a predetermined area (game area 3) provided inside the gaming machine frame to be visually recognized;
A game medium storage part (operation mechanism part 230) that is located below the window part and can store a game medium (game ball);
A grounding means (falling prevention mechanism 95) that is provided in the game medium storage unit and can be grounded by extending downward from the game medium storage unit;
The grounding means is
It can be switched to use state or non-use state,
A groundable first grounding member (first plate 96) and a groundable second grounding member (second plate 97);
When not in use, the first grounding member and the second grounding member are not grounded (see FIG. 20),
In the use state, the first grounding member is grounded longer in the front-rear direction than the left-right direction, while the second grounding member is grounded longer in the left-right direction than the front-rear direction (see FIG. 25). It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the grounding means provided in the game medium storage unit is put into use. Thereby, it is possible to ground the first grounding member and ground the second grounding member. At this time, the first grounding member can be grounded long in the front-rear direction, and the second grounding member can be grounded long in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to support the gaming machine with a good balance.

  By the way, like a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-16722, a frame movable member, a large decorative member, a light emitting member, or the like can be disposed in a recent upper decorative portion. For this reason, the upper decoration part tends to increase in size and protrude forward. Therefore, there is a possibility that the gaming machine falls forward due to the front side of the upper part of the gaming machine becoming heavy. Therefore, the invention according to the above-described means B1 to B10 is grounded by being provided in the game medium storage unit and extending downward from the game medium storage unit with respect to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-16722. It differs in that it has possible grounding means. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem that the gaming machine is prevented from falling forward due to the grounding means extending downward from the game medium storage unit and grounding (advantageous effect).

<Means C>
The invention according to means C1 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A gaming machine frame (50) including a frame-shaped base frame portion (inner frame 52) and an openable / closable frame portion (front frame 53) that can be opened and closed with respect to the base frame portion;
The gaming machine frame is
Either the upper, lower, left, or right opposing edge (the upper, lower, left, or right opposing edge where the inner frame 52 and the front frame 53 face each other) (the upper opposing edge) where the base frame and the opening / closing frame are opposed to each other. A gaming machine comprising a lock mechanism (special lock mechanism 49) that can maintain and release the closed state of the open / close frame portion with respect to the base frame portion.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to sufficiently maintain the closed state of the open / close frame portion with respect to the base frame portion by the lock mechanism provided at the opposite edge portion.

The invention according to means C2
In the gaming machine described in means C1,
In the gaming machine, the lock mechanism is an upper lock mechanism (special lock mechanism 49) provided at an upper opposite edge extending in the left-right direction on the upper side of the opposite edge.

  According to the gaming machine of this configuration, even if a heavy object is arranged on the upper part of the gaming machine frame, the upper locking mechanism provided on the upper facing edge portion closes the opening / closing frame part with respect to the base frame part. It is possible to maintain it firmly.

The invention according to means C3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means C2,
The upper lock mechanism is a gaming machine characterized in that it is provided at a central portion (53M) in the left-right direction of the upper facing edge (see FIG. 2).

  According to the gaming machine of this configuration, if a heavy object is disposed at the center in the left-right direction at the top of the opening / closing frame, it is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the upper facing edge. With the upper lock mechanism, it is possible to effectively suppress the opening of the open / close frame portion with respect to the base frame portion.

The invention according to means C4 is
In the gaming machine described in the means C2 or C3,
The upper locking mechanism is
An insertion convex portion (special locking piece 56f) provided on either the base frame portion or the opening / closing frame portion;
An insertion recess (opening 78d) provided on the other of the base frame part or the opening / closing frame part;
A locking portion (L-shaped portion 79d) provided inside the insertion recess and capable of locking with the insertion projection,
When the opening / closing frame portion is closed with respect to the base frame portion, the insertion convex portion is inserted into the insertion concave portion, and the insertion convex portion is engaged with the locking portion, thereby the opening / closing frame. The game machine is characterized in that the closed state of the portion with respect to the base frame portion is maintained (see FIGS. 18B and 19).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the open / close frame portion is closed with respect to the base frame portion, the insertion convex portion is inserted into the insertion concave portion, and the insertion convex portion is locked with the locking portion. Thereby, the closed state with respect to the base frame part of an opening-and-closing frame part is maintained. In this way, the special lock mechanism can maintain the closed state without performing a special operation.

The invention according to means C5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means C2 to means C4,
The gaming machine frame is
Among the opposed edges, a free-end side edge (right side) that opens and closes, and a free-end side edge that extends in the vertical direction (a right-side opposed edge where the right edge 56R of the base frame 56 and the right edge 58R of the holding frame 58 face each other) Part) is provided with a normal locking mechanism (47) capable of maintaining the closed state of the opening and closing frame part with respect to the base frame part and releasable,
A closure releasing device (locking device 48) for releasing the closed state by the normal lock mechanism based on a specific operation (turning the key to the left with the key inserted through the keyhole with respect to the locking device main body 48a);
The closure release device is a gaming machine that releases the closed state by the normal lock mechanism and releases the closed state by the upper lock mechanism based on the specific operation.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when a specific operation is performed on the closure release device, it is possible to release the closed state by the normal lock mechanism and the closed state by the upper lock mechanism. That is, it is not necessary to separately perform the release of the closed state by the normal lock mechanism and the release of the closed state by the upper lock mechanism. Therefore, it is possible to open the open / close frame portion with respect to the base frame portion by a simple method.

The invention according to means C6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the means C2 to C5,
The gaming machine frame is
A window (glass plate 55) that allows a predetermined area (game area 3) provided inside the gaming machine frame to be visually recognized;
An upper decorative part (upper decorative part 200) that is located above the window part and decorates the upper part of the gaming machine frame;
A game medium storage part (operation mechanism part 230) that is located below the window part and can store a game medium (game ball);
A curtain plate portion (curtain plate 51a) located below the game medium storage portion,
The length (distance L1) from the front end position (P1) of the upper decoration portion to the front end position (front surface position P2) of the curtain plate portion is determined from the front end position (P3) of the game medium storage portion to the curtain plate portion. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is at least twice the length (distance L2) to the front end position (see FIG. 4).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the length from the front end position of the upper decoration portion to the front end position of the curtain plate portion is more than twice the length from the front end position of the game medium storage portion to the front end position of the curtain plate portion. Therefore, the upper side of the gaming machine protrudes greatly forward. Therefore, the gaming machine frame is arranged with heavy objects on the top. Therefore, as described above, the closed state of the open / close frame portion with respect to the base frame portion can be firmly maintained by the upper lock mechanism provided at the upper facing edge portion.

The invention according to means C7 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A gaming machine frame (50) including a frame-shaped base frame portion (inner frame 52) and an openable / closable frame portion (front frame 53) that can be opened and closed with respect to the base frame portion;
The gaming machine frame is
A right-side lock mechanism (normal lock mechanism 47) that can maintain and release the closed state of the open / close frame portion with respect to the base frame portion is provided at a right-side opposite edge portion that extends in the vertical direction on the right side among the opposite edge portions. ,
An upper lock mechanism (special lock mechanism 49) that can maintain and release the closed state of the open / close frame portion with respect to the base frame portion is provided at an upper opposite edge portion that extends in the left-right direction on the upper side among the opposed edge portions. It is a gaming machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to maintain the closed state of the open / close frame portion with respect to the base frame portion by the right lock mechanism provided at the right opposite edge portion. Furthermore, it is possible to maintain the closed state of the open / close frame portion with respect to the base frame portion more firmly by the upper lock mechanism provided at the upper facing edge portion.

  By the way, the weight of the open / close frame portion tends to increase because a movable frame movable member is arranged in the open / close frame portion of recent gaming machine frames or a large decorative member, a light emitting member, or the like is arranged. is there. Therefore, in the gaming machine frame described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-117188, even when the opening / closing frame portion is closed to the base frame portion, the closed state of the opening / closing frame portion with respect to the base frame portion may not be sufficiently maintained. there were. Therefore, the invention according to the above-described means C1 to C6 is applied to any one of the upper, lower, left and right opposing edge portions where the base frame portion and the open / close frame portion face each other with respect to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2003-117188. The opening / closing frame portion is different in that it is capable of maintaining a closed state with respect to the base frame portion and having a releasable lock mechanism. With this lock mechanism, it is possible to solve the problem of sufficiently maintaining the closed state of the open / close frame portion with respect to the base frame portion (to provide an effect).

<Means D>
The invention according to means D1
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A gaming machine frame (50) including a first frame member (outer frame 51) and a second frame member (inner frame 52) that can be opened and closed with respect to the first frame member;
Hinge means (lower hinge mechanism 46) for pivotally supporting the second frame member with respect to the first frame member,
The hinge means is
A fixed-side hinge member (outer frame-side support member 46a) attached to the first frame member;
A rotation-side hinge member (inner frame side mounting member 46c) attached to the second frame member,
One of the fixed-side hinge member and the rotation-side hinge member (outer frame side support member 46a) is formed to have a flat surface portion (upper surface portion 46a1) formed in a flat shape and a convex shape from the flat surface portion. A projecting portion (inner bulging portion 46f),
The other of the fixed-side hinge member and the rotation-side hinge member (the inner frame-side mounting member 46c) has the convexity when the second frame member rotates around the rotation center of the hinge means. It is a gaming machine characterized by being slidable with respect to the part (see FIGS. 12A, 12B, and 12C).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second frame member is rotated by the hinge means, the rotation-side hinge member is rotated with respect to the fixed-side hinge member. At this time, the other of the fixed side hinge member or the rotary side hinge member can slide with respect to the convex portion provided on one of the fixed side hinge member or the rotary side hinge member. That is, it is possible to reduce the portion where the rotation-side hinge member and the stationary-side hinge member are in surface contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to avoid the sliding of the rotation-side hinge member due to the scraping between the flat surfaces. That is, it is possible to avoid the second frame member from becoming difficult to rotate with respect to the first frame member.

The invention relating to the means D2
In the gaming machine described in the means D1,
The hinge means is provided on the lower side of the gaming machine frame, and the fixed side hinge member is arranged on the lower side of the rotating side hinge member (see FIGS. 7 and 9).
According to the rotation of the second frame member, the convex portion has a distance (V1) between a position that contacts either the fixed-side hinge member or the rotation-side hinge member and the rotation center of the hinge means. FIG. 8B shows a gaming machine that is formed so as to change.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second frame member is rotated by the hinge means, the weight or the like of the second frame member acts on the fixed-side hinge member via the rotation-side hinge member. At this time, the distance between the position where the convex portion abuts and the rotation center of the hinge means changes. That is, the convex portion is not formed along a concentric circle with respect to the rotation center of the hinge means. Therefore, when the second frame member rotates, it is avoided that only a predetermined portion of the hinge member (the other of the fixed side hinge member or the rotation side hinge member) that contacts the convex portion always contacts the convex portion. It is possible. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the predetermined portion is greatly shaved.

The invention according to means D3 is
In the gaming machine described in means D2,
The convex portion is formed in an arc shape in plan view, and the center of the radius of curvature of the convex portion is provided on the rotation center side of the hinge means (see FIG. 8B). It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the convex portion is not formed in an arc shape along a concentric circle around the rotation center of the hinge means, but can be formed in an arc shape approximate to the arc shape. Thereby, when the rotation-side hinge member rotates, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the sliding resistance (friction resistance) acting on the hinge member (the other of the fixed-side hinge member or the rotation-side hinge member).

The invention according to means D4 is
In the gaming machine described in the means D2 or the means D3,
The fixed-side hinge member includes the planar portion and the convex portion,
The said convex part is formed so that the front-end part (46f1) may follow the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation center of the said hinge means in planar view (refer FIG. 8 (B)).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second frame member is rotated so as to be closed with respect to the first frame member, the rotation-side hinge member first rides on the front end portion of the convex portion. At this time, since the front end portion of the convex portion is along the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation center of the hinge means, it is possible to smoothly ride the rotation-side hinge member.

The invention according to means D5 is
In the gaming machine described in means D4,
The convex part is raised in an arc shape from the flat part in a longitudinal section,
The front end portion of the convex portion is formed lower than the portion located behind the front end portion of the convex portion, and is formed so as to have a smaller curvature in the longitudinal section (FIG. 13C). This is a gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second frame member is rotated so as to be closed with respect to the first frame member, the rotation-side hinge member first rides on the front end portion of the convex portion. At this time, since the front end portion of the convex portion is lower and has a smaller curvature in the longitudinal cross section than the portion located behind it, it is possible to smoothly ride on the rotating side hinge member.

The invention according to means D6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the means D2 to D5,
Either the fixed-side hinge member or the rotation-side hinge member is formed in a convex shape from the flat portion at a position away from the projection with respect to the rotation center of the hinge means. With other convex parts (outer bulging part 46g),
Either the fixed-side hinge member or the rotation-side hinge member can slide with respect to the convex portion when the second frame member rotates about the rotation center of the hinge means. In addition, the gaming machine is characterized by being slidable with respect to the other convex portion (see FIG. 12C).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second frame member rotates, the hinge member (the other of the fixed-side hinge member or the rotation-side hinge member) is in contact with both the convex portion and the other convex portion. Slide. Therefore, compared with the case where it slides only with respect to a convex part, it is possible to stabilize the sliding of a hinge member (the other of a fixed side hinge member or a rotation side hinge member).

The invention according to means D7 is
In the gaming machine described in means D6,
The other convex part is
According to the rotation of the second frame member, the distance (V2, FIG. 8B) between the position of contact with either the fixed-side hinge member or the rotation-side hinge member and the rotation center of the hinge means. )) Is a game machine characterized by being formed to change.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second frame member rotates, the distance between the position where the other convex portion abuts and the rotation center of the hinge means changes. That is, not only the convex portions but also other convex portions are not formed along concentric circles with respect to the rotation center of the hinge means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the hinge member (the other of the fixed-side hinge member or the rotation-side hinge member) that contacts the convex portion and the other convex portion to be scraped off.

The invention according to means D8 is
In the gaming machine described in the means D6 or D7,
The convex portion and the other convex portion are
When the second frame member is rotated so as to be closed with respect to the first frame member, the position where the convex portion comes into contact with either the fixed side hinge member or the rotary side hinge member; The distance between the other convex part and the position where the other side of the fixed-side hinge member or the rotating-side hinge member abuts is gradually increased (FIG. 8B). This is a gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second frame member is rotated so as to be closed, the distance between the position where the convex portion abuts and the position where the other convex portion abuts gradually increases. Thereby, it is possible to further stabilize the sliding of the hinge member (the other of the fixed side hinge member or the rotation side hinge member) that abuts against the convex part and the other convex part. Therefore, the closing operation of the second frame member can be made smooth.

The invention according to means D9 is
In the gaming machine according to means D2 to means D7,
The gaming machine frame is
A window (glass plate 55) that allows a predetermined area (game area 3) provided inside the gaming machine frame to be visually recognized;
An upper decorative part (upper decorative part 200) that is positioned above the window part and decorates the upper side of the gaming machine frame;
A game medium storage part (operation mechanism part 230) that is located below the window part and can store a game medium (game ball);
A curtain plate portion (curtain plate 51a) located on the front side and positioned below the game medium storage portion,
The length (distance L1) from the front end position (P1) of the upper decoration portion to the front end position (front surface position P2) of the curtain plate portion is determined from the front end position (P3) of the game medium storage portion to the curtain plate portion. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is at least twice the length (distance L2) to the front end position (see FIG. 4).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the length from the front end position of the upper decoration portion to the front end position of the curtain plate portion is more than twice the length from the front end position of the game medium storage portion to the front end position of the curtain plate portion. Therefore, the upper side of the gaming machine protrudes greatly forward. For this reason, by placing a heavy object on the upper part of the gaming machine frame, the hinge member (the other of the fixed-side hinge member or the rotation-side hinge member) that comes into contact with the convex portion is more easily scraped. Therefore, as described above, by not forming the convex portion along the concentric circle with respect to the rotation center of the hinge means, it is possible to make the hinge member difficult to be cut as locally as possible.

The invention according to means D10 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A gaming machine frame (50) including a first frame member (outer frame 51) and a second frame member (inner frame 52) that can be opened and closed with respect to the first frame member;
Hinge means (lower hinge mechanism 46) for pivotally supporting the second frame member with respect to the first frame member,
The hinge means is
A fixed-side hinge member (outer frame-side support member 46a) attached to the first frame member;
A rotation-side hinge member (inner frame side mounting member 46c) attached to the second frame member,
One of the fixed-side hinge member and the rotation-side hinge member (outer frame side support member 46a) is formed to have a flat surface portion (upper surface portion 46a1) formed in a flat shape and a convex shape from the flat surface portion. A projecting portion (inner bulging portion 46f),
When the second frame member rotates around the rotation center (H1) of the hinge means, either the fixed-side hinge member or the rotation-side hinge member (the inner frame-side mounting member 46c) is rotated. Slidable relative to the convex part,
The convex portion is
It is not formed along a concentric circle (GA) around the rotation center of the hinge means,
It is formed in an arc shape in a plan view, and the center of the radius of curvature of the convex portion is provided in the vicinity of the rotation center of the hinge means (see FIG. 8B). It is a gaming machine to play.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second frame member is rotated by the hinge means, the weight or the like of the second frame member acts on the fixed-side hinge member via the rotation-side hinge member. At this time, since the convex portion is not formed along a concentric circle around the rotation center of the hinge means, only a predetermined portion of the hinge member (the other of the fixed side hinge member or the rotational side hinge member) is always convex. It is possible to avoid contact with the part. Furthermore, the convex portion is formed in an arc shape in a plan view, and the center of the radius of curvature of the convex portion is provided in the vicinity of the rotation center. Therefore, it is possible to make the convex portion approximate to an arc shape along a concentric circle. Thereby, when the rotation-side hinge member rotates, it is possible to reduce the sliding resistance (friction resistance) acting on the hinge member as much as possible.

  By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81597, the second frame member (for example, the inner frame) is connected to the first frame member (for example, the outer frame) by the hinge means provided in the gaming machine frame. When rotated, the rotation-side hinge member slides while being in surface contact with each other with respect to the fixed-side hinge member. For this reason, the second frame member is repeatedly rotated, so that the above-described planes are greatly scraped. As a result, the sliding resistance (friction resistance) becomes excessively large, and there is a possibility that the sliding of the rotation-side hinge member is deteriorated. That is, the second frame member may be difficult to rotate with respect to the first frame member. Therefore, in the invention according to the above-described means D1 to D10, either the fixed-side hinge member or the rotating-side hinge member is formed in a flat shape with respect to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2004-81597. And a convex portion formed in a convex shape from the planar portion, and the convex portion is fixed when the second frame member rotates about the rotation center of the hinge means. Or it is different in the point which can be slid to either one of the said rotation side hinge members. As a result, it is possible to reduce the portion of the plane-side hinge member and the stationary-side hinge member that are in plane contact with each other, and it is possible to prevent the second frame member from rotating relative to the first frame member. It is possible to solve the problem of performing (acting effects).

<Means E>
The invention according to means E1
A game board (game board 2),
A base frame portion (outer frame 51 and inner frame 52) for mounting the game board;
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising a front frame part (front frame 53) positioned in front of the base frame part,
A curtain plate (curtain plate 51a) located below the front frame portion and fixed to the base frame portion;
The front frame part is
An opening (opening portion 53a) is formed through which a predetermined area of the game board surface (game board surface 2a) of the game board is visible,
A plate-like window member (glass plate 55) that closes the opening;
The gaming machine is characterized in that a front surface of the window member is positioned in front of a front surface of the curtain.

  According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the window member is formed between the rear surface of the window member and the game board surface such that the front surface of the window member is positioned more forward than the front surface of the curtain plate. It is possible to arrange the game space to be played forward. That is, by causing the game ball to flow down to a position close to the player, it is possible to show the player the movement of the game ball more dynamically. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

The invention according to means E2
In the gaming machine described in means E1,
The gaming board is a gaming machine characterized in that a material capable of transmitting visible light is mainly used as a constituent material.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the presence of the game board can be weakened. Thereby, even if the game board has a configuration close to the player, it is possible to reduce the feeling of pressure felt by the player.

The invention according to means E3 is
In the gaming machine according to means E1 or means E2,
The gaming board surface is located behind the front surface of the curtain, and is a gaming machine.

  As the game board gets closer, the player tends to feel a sense of pressure. However, according to the gaming machine of this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game board from being too close to the player, and it is possible not to give the player a feeling of pressure that makes the player feel uncomfortable. is there.

The invention according to means E4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to means E3,
A gaming machine having a decoration part (a board movable body 15 and a first image display device 6) located behind the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, a sufficient space is ensured behind the game board, so that a decorative portion that can utilize the sufficient space can be arranged. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

The invention according to means E5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means E2 to means E4,
The decorative portion includes a plurality of decorative members (first panel movable body 15A, second panel movable body 15B, third panel movable body 15C, first image display device 6) arranged in the front-rear direction. It is a gaming machine to play.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to perform a wide variety of effects and the like by the plurality of decorative members arranged in a sufficient space behind the game board. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

  By the way, for example, in a conventional gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-305183, the rear surface of the window member of the front frame portion and the front surface of the base frame portion are configured to match each other. . Further, the curtain plate is provided with a predetermined thickness at a position below the front frame portion on the front side surface of the base frame portion. In the conventional gaming machine, the front surface of the curtain is positioned in front of the front surface of the window member, and the game space where the game ball flows down is far from the player. Therefore, the invention according to the means E1 to E5 described above is different from the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-305183 in that the front surface of the window member is positioned forward of the front surface of the curtain plate. To do. And since the front surface of the window member is positioned forward of the front surface of the curtain, it is possible to show the player the flow of the game ball closer to the game, and the game can be more interesting It is possible to solve the problem of providing a machine (working effects).

The invention according to means E6 is
A game board (game board 2),
A base frame portion (outer frame 51 and inner frame 52) for mounting the game board;
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising a front frame part (front frame 53) positioned in front of the base frame part,
A curtain plate (curtain plate 51a) located below the front frame portion and fixed to the base frame portion;
The curtain is a gaming machine having a decoration on the front surface.

  Conventionally, like a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-305183, a curtain plate provided on an outer frame is usually not decorated. In other words, the curtains block the space below the gaming machine and suppress the entry of, for example, a player's property or a game ball spilled from the gaming machine into the space below the gaming machine. It is intended. For this reason, conventionally, a flat front surface and no color or pattern are used. However, since the curtain is located on the front side of the gaming machine, the player can visually recognize the appearance of the gaming machine. Therefore, the invention according to the means E6 described above is different from the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-305183 in that the front surface of the curtain is decorated. Then, the front face of the decorated curtain can be contributed to the improvement of the aesthetics of the gaming machine, and the problem of providing a gaming machine that can be more interesting is solved (acts and effects). It is possible.

The invention according to means E7 is
A game board (game board 2),
A base frame portion (outer frame 51 and inner frame 52) for mounting the game board;
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising a front frame part (front frame 53) positioned in front of the base frame part,
Located below the front frame portion, fixed to the base frame portion, and has a curtain (decoration plate 51a) decorated on the front surface,
The front frame part is
An opening (opening portion 53a) is formed through which a predetermined area of the game board surface (game board surface 2a) of the game board is visible,
A plate-like window member (glass plate 55) that closes the opening;
The gaming machine is characterized in that a front surface of the window member is positioned in front of a front surface of the curtain.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to improve the appearance of the appearance because the curtain is decorated. Furthermore, the movement of the game ball can be shown to the player in a more dynamic manner by arranging the window member so that the front surface of the window member is more forward than the front surface of the curtain. . Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 3 ... Game area 6 ... 1st image display apparatus 7 ... 2nd image display apparatus 7a ... Display screen 7b ... Upper part 50 ... Gaming machine frame 51 ... Outer frame 51a ... Screen board 52 ... Inner frame 53 ... Front Frame 55 ... Glass plate 55a ... Upper part 200 ... Upper decorative part 800 ... Lower cover

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A gaming machine frame including a frame-shaped base frame portion and a front frame portion located on the front side of the base frame portion;
Display means having a predetermined display area,
The gaming machine frame is
A window member that is provided inside the gaming machine frame and allows a game area where a game ball can flow down to be visually recognized ;
An upper decoration part that is positioned above the window member and decorates the upper part of the gaming machine frame,
At least a part of the display area is arranged above the game area and is arranged behind the upper part of the window member,
The upper decorative part is
The lower end portion is formed so as to be positioned upward as it goes rearward,
A front lower end portion located on the front side of the lower end portion, and a rear lower end portion located on the rear side of the lower end portion,
The front lower end portion is positioned below the upper portion of the window member, while the rear lower end portion is positioned higher than the upper portion of the window member, so that at least one of the display areas. A gaming machine characterized by being configured so that a portion can be visually recognized.

Images